JVC KD-G820 User Manual

FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-AR870/KD-G820
RECEPTOR CON CD KD-AR870/KD-G820
RECEPTEUR CD KD-AR870/KD-G820
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 8.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

For customer Use:
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Enter below the Model
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet.
Retain this information
INSTRUCTIONS for future reference.
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS Model No.
Serial No.
GET0359-001A
[J]
Cover_KD-AR870_820[J]1.indd 2 5/12/05 4:54:26 pm

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
ENGLISH
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
How to reset your unit How to forcibly eject a disc
“Please Eject” appears on the display.
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user ’s authority to operate the
equipment.
EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 2 9/12/05 4:38:38 pm

How to use the MODE/SEL button
If you use MODE or SEL (select), the display
CONTENTS
ENGLISH
and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the Control panel — KD-AR870 and KD-G820 ....... 5
control dial) enter the corresponding control
mode. Remote controller — RM-RK50 ................. 6
Getting started ................................. 7
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after Basic operations ................................................... 7
pressing MODE, to operate the FM
tuner. Radio operations .............................. 9
Disc/USB memory operations............. 11
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 11
Playing discs in the CD changer ............................ 11
Playing a USB memory ......................................... 12
Sound adjustments ........................... 16
General settings — PSM ................... 18
Title assignment............................... 27
Satellite radio operations.................. 28
iPod®/D. player operations ................ 32
Other external component
Works as time countdown indicator. operations .................................... 34
More about this unit ......................... 35
To use these controls for original functions Maintenance .................................... 39
again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared. Troubleshooting ............................... 40
• Pressing MODE again also restores original Specifications ................................... 45
functions. However, pressing SEL makes the
unit enters a different mode.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as
this will block outside sounds, making driving
dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any
complicated operations.
Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.
3
EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 3 9/12/05 10:55:07 am

How to read this manual Caution:
• Button operations are mainly explained with
If the temperature inside the car is below
ENGLISH
the illustrations in the table below.

0°C, the movement of animation and text
• Some related tips and notes are explained in
scroll will be halted on the display to prevent
“More about this unit” (see pages 35 – 38).
the display from being blurred.
appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the
Press briefly.
operating temperature is resumed, these
functions will start working again.
Press repeatedly.
Warning:
Press either
one. If you need to operate the unit while driving,
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be
involved in a traffic accident.
Press and hold until your
desired response begins.
Press and hold both Caution on volume setting:

buttons at the same time.
Discs produce very little noise compared
with other sources. Lower the volume
The following marks are used to indicate... before playing a disc to avoid damaging
: Built-in CD player operations. the speakers by the sudden increase of the
output level.
: External CD changer operations.
: External USB memory operations.
EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 4 5/12/05 4:52:28 pm

Control panel — KD-AR870 and KD-G820
ENGLISH
Parts identification
1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button

2 • Control dial 8 0 (eject) button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
3 DISP (display) button p SRC (source) button
4 Remote sensor q (control panel release) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to w SEL (select) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial e MODE button
lighting). r Number buttons
5 Display window t 4/¢ buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching... Attaching...
Lever CAUTION:
The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while
the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back
into lock position before attaching the panel.
EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 5 9/12/05 9:50:35 am

Remote controller — RM-RK50
ENGLISH
Installing the lithium coin battery Caution:

(CR2025)
Main elements and features

Aim the remote controller directly at the
remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is
no obstacle in between.
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may
explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other
metallic materials. 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
similar tools. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate • Turns the power off if pressed and held.
when throwing away or saving it. 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
USB.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an
MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Changes the folder if pressed and held.
• While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or
XM) radio:
– Changes the categories.
EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 6 5/12/05 4:52:30 pm

• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
JVC D. player: Getting started
– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
ENGLISH
D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now Basic operations
5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
~ Turn on the power.
3 VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
4 SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (i-EQ: intelligent
5
equalizer).
SOURCE button
Ÿ
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
*1 Only for KD-AR870.
• While listening to the satellite radio:
*2 You cannot select these sources if they
– Changes the channels if pressed briefly.
are not ready or not connected.
– Changes the channels rapidly if pressed
and held.
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player
!
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,
• For FM/AM tuner
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and
held.
• For SIRIUS tuner
* 5 U: Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞: Confirms the selection.
• For XM tuner
⁄ Adjust the volume.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 16 – 18.)
Continued on next page...

7
EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 7 5/12/05 4:52:31 pm

To drop the volume in a moment (ATT) To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off
ENGLISH
To restore the sound, press it

again.
To turn off the power

Changing the display pattern
Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
18 – 21.
Source operation display
1
2-1 Canceling the display

demonstrations “SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
Turn the control dial to set “Demo/Link”
to “Off.”
*2
2-2 Setting the clock
1 Press number button 4 ( ).
“Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then, “LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed.
turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
(minute). Then, turn the control
dial to adjust the minute. Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 19).
3 Press ¢ to select “24H/12H.”
Then, turn the control dial to select
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time Goes back to the initial display pattern.
display mode.
*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen
(see pages 22 – 25).
3 Exit from the setting.
Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
a longer time to show it on the display.
*2 The information bar will disappear if no
operation is performed for five seconds.
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 8 20/12/05 3:44:53 pm

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
Radio operations receive
ENGLISH
1
~
2
! Start searching for a station. 3 Exit from the setting.
When a station is received, searching lights up on the display.

stops. Reception improves, but stereo effect will
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast be lost.
with sufficient signal strength,
lights up on the display. To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
in step 2. goes off.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
To tune in to a station manually

Storing stations in memory
In step ! above...
1 You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential
2 Select a desired station frequency. Memory)
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you
want to store into.

9
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 9 5/12/05 4:52:47 pm

3 Select “SSM.” Using the Preset Station List
• When appears on the display, you can
ENGLISH
move back to the previous display by pressing

number button 3.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 on left column.

4 • By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 below).
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM
band. 3 Display the Preset Station List.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
Using the number buttons

1
4 Select the preset number you want to
store into.
2
• You can move to the lists of the other FM

bands by pressing number button 5
3 ( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.
5 Store the station.
10
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 10 5/12/05 4:52:48 pm

Listening to a preset station Disc/USB memory
ENGLISH
Using the number buttons operations
1
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you
want to listen to.
or
To stop playback and eject the disc
Using the Preset Station List

Playing discs in the CD changer
1 Display the Preset Station List, then All discs in the magazine will be played
select the preset station you want to repeatedly until you change the source.
listen to. • Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
2 Change to the selected station. ~
* If you have changed the external input

setting to “Ext In” (see page 21), you
cannot select the CD changer.
Ÿ Select a disc.
For disc number from 01 – 06:
11
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 11 5/12/05 4:52:51 pm

Playing a USB memory Track and folder information (CD/CD Text/
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH
USB memory.
Once you insert a disc or attach a USB
All tracks in the USB memory will be played
memory, the total track number/total
repeatedly until you change the source.
playing time (for CD/CD Text) and total
• Removing the USB memory will also stop
folder number/total track number (for MP3/
playback.
WMA/USB) appears, then the following
~ information appears...
Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source
Current folder number*1

Current disc number*2 Elapsed playing time
File type*1*3 Current track number
Ÿ USB input terminal

• For the audio CD or CD Text:
Disc name*4 and Track name*5
• For the MP3/WMA/USB:
Folder name and File name, or
Album/performer*6 and Track name*6
USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total

numbers will not appear.
If a USB memory has been attached...
*1 Displayed only when an MP3/WMA
track is played back.
*2 Displayed only when “CD-CH” is selected
as the source.
*3 Either MP3 or WMA indicator lights up
depending on the detected file.
Playback starts from where it has been stopped
*4 Appears only for CD Texts and CDs if
previously.
it has been recorded or assigned. (“No
• If a different USB memory is currently
Name” appears if no name is recorded or
attached, playback starts from the beginning.
assigned.)
*5 Appears only for CD Texts. (“No Name”
To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it
appears if no name is recorded.)
out from the unit.
*6 Appears only when “Tag” is set to “On”
(see page 20).
Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB memory if it might
hinder your safety driving.
• Make sure all the important data has been
backed up to avoid losing the data.
12
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 12 5/12/05 4:52:52 pm

About MP3 and WMA tracks To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and MP3/WMA/USB)
ENGLISH
“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:
When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/

WMA disc includes an image <jtw> file
edited by Image Converter (Ver 3.0)—
supplied in the CD-ROM, you can show the For the main unit:
image on the display while the tracks in the • Holding either of the buttons can display the
folder are played back—Image Link. (See Folder List (see page 14).
pages 19 and 37 for details.) For CD changer:
• Holding either of the buttons can display the
Disc List (see page 14).
About the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
compatible CD changer with your unit. (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly
• You can also connect MP3-incompatible
CD changers. These units, however, are not
compatible with MP3 discs. To select a number from 01 – 06:
• You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and
KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.
• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD
changer.
• Disc text information recorded in the CD To select a number from 07 – 12:
Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text
compatible CD changer is connected.
• For connection, see Installation/Connection
Manual (separate volume).
To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/

USB, it is required that folders are assigned
with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their
folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.
To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3/WMA/USB):
13
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 13 5/12/05 4:52:55 pm

Other main functions 5 Change to the selected item.
ENGLISH
Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list
• When appears on the display, you can • The list disappears and playback starts.
number button 3.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
1
Only possible on JVC
2 Select “LIST.” MP3-compatible CD changer
• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9).
3 Select the list type.
Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be
*1 Selectable only when the source is selected and vice versa.
“CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the media is MP3,
WMA, or USB. 3
4 Select an item.
EX.: When “File” is selected in step 3
• You can move to the other lists by

pressing number button 5 ( ) or
6( ) repeatedly.
14
EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 14 12/28/05 7:29:59 PM

Prohibiting disc ejection 7 Repeat play
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
ENGLISH
• “No Eject” appears on the display. Mode Plays repeatedly
Track: The current track [ ].
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder
procedure. [ ].
• “Eject OK” appears on the display. Disc*2: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
Off: Cancels.
Selecting the playback modes

7 Random play
You can use only one of the following playback
modes at a time.
2 Select your desired playback mode. Mode Plays at random

7 Intro play Folder*1: All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on [ ].
Disc*3: All tracks of the current disc
[ ].
All*4: All tracks of the inserted discs
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of...
*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Track: All tracks of the current disc or USB).
USB memory [ ]. *2 Only while playing discs in the CD
Folder*1: First tracks of all folders changer.
[ ]. *3 Only while playing a disc.
Disc*2: First tracks of all the inserted *4 Only while playing discs in the CD
discs [ ]. changer or playing a USB memory.
Off: Cancels.
• You can also cancel the playback mode by
pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.
15

2 Use 4/¢ to select a
Sound adjustments cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
• 80Hz: Frequencies higher than
ENGLISH
80 Hz are cut off.

Adjusting the sound • 120Hz: Frequencies higher than
120 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your • 160Hz: Frequencies higher than
preference. 160 Hz are cut off.
move back to the previous display by pressing 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
number button 3. subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]
C VolAdjust
1 Turn the control dial to adjust the input
level of each source (except FM).
[–5 to +5]
2 Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
• Before making an adjustment, select a
source you want to adjust.
D Loudness
• For “EQ” setting, see the following.
Turn the control dial to activate or
deactivate the loudness to produce a
3 Adjust the selected setting item. well-balanced sound at low volume
levels. [Off or On]
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance)
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment 4 Exit from the setting.
display.
2 Adjust the speaker output balance
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear
speakers. [F06 to R06]
4/¢ :
between the left and right
Selecting preset sound modes
speakers. [L06 to R06] (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
B Subwoofer the music genre.
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment Available sound modes
display.
FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
(Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3
16
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 16 17/12/05 2:55:04 pm

Storing your own sound modes Sound Range/selectable items
elements Low Mid High
ENGLISH
You can adjust the sound modes and store your
own adjustments in memory. Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
• When appears on the display, you can +06 +06 +06
move back to the previous display by pressing FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
number button 3. (Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
100 Hz 1.5kHz 15 kHz
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
Q (Band Q1.0 Q0.5 Fix
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 16. Q2.0 Q1.25
• In step 2, select “EQ.”
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
2 Select a sound mode. frequency ranges.
6 Store the adjustments.
To display the rest
3 Select a frequency range.
4 Adjust the sound elements of the

selected frequency range.
1 Use 5 / ∞ to adjust the level.
2 Press number button 2 ( ),
then turn the control dial to select the
frequency.
3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
turn the control dial to select the band
width.
17

The list below shows the preset value setting for each sound mode:
Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High

modes Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band Level FREQ Q (Band
(Frequency) width) (Frequency) width) (Frequency) width)
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
H.ROCK +03 100 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz
JAZZ +03 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz Fix
DANCE +04 60 Hz Q1.0 -02 1 kHz Q1.0 +01 10 kHz
COUNTRY +02 60 Hz Q1.0 00 1 kHz Q1.0 +02 12.5kHz
REGGAE +03 60 Hz Q1.25 +02 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 12.5kHz
CLASSIC +01 80 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 10 kHz
General settings — PSM

Basic procedure 3 Select a PSM item.
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed (except “Sirius ID”) in the table that
follows. • By pressing either of the buttons
repeatedly, you can also move to the item
1 of the other categories.
4 Adjust the selected PSM item.
An item previously selected appears on the

display.
2 Select a PSM category.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust other
PSM items if necessary.

To display the rest
18

Category Indications Selectable settings, [reference page]
Demo/Link Demo: [Initial]; Display demonstration will be
ENGLISH
Display activated automatically, [8].
demonstration Image Link: To show a still image while playing MP3/
WMA tracks, [13, 37].
Off: Cancels.
• Still image appears if no operation is done for about
MOVIE
20 seconds.
LevelMeter You can select the different level meter patterns.
Audio level meter Meter 1 [Initial] O Meter 2
• Press DISP repeatedly to show the selected level meter.
Pict Download: [Initial]; Download files, [22].
Pictures Set: Activate the stored files, [25]
Delete: Delete the stored files, [23].
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [8]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 1 (1:00AM)]
Clock Min 00 – 59, [8]
Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (1:00AM)]
24H/12H 12Hours – 24Hours, [8]
Time display mode [Initial: 12Hours]
Clock Adj*1 Auto: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically
Automatic clock adjusted using the clock data provided via
CLOCK
adjustment the satellite radio channel.

Off: Cancels.
Time Zone*1*2 Select your residential area from one of the following time
Time zone zones for clock adjustment.
Eastern [Initial] O Atlantic O Newfndlnd (Newfoundland)
O Alaska O Pacific O Mountain O Central O (back to
the beginning)
DST*1*2 Activate this if your residential area is subject to DST.
Daylight saving time On: [Initial]; Activates daylight savings time.
Off: Cancels.
Scroll Once: [Initial]; Scrolls the track information once.
DISPLAY
Scroll Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).

Off: Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the
display regardless of the setting.
*1 Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.
*2 Adjustable only when “Clock Adj” is set to “Auto.” Press number button 1 ( ) to show the
setting display.

19
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 19 12/28/05 6:46:11 PM

Dimmer Auto: [Initial]; Dims the display when you turn on
ENGLISH
Dimmer the headlights.

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Time Set: Set the timer for dimmer, [25].
Any hour – Any hour
From – To*3: [Initial: 6PM – 7AM]
Contrast 1 – 10: [Initial: 5]; Adjust the display contrast to
Contrast make the display indications clear and
legible.
DISPLAY
LCD Type Negative: [Initial]; Negative pattern of the display

Display type (except still images and animation).
Auto: Positive pattern will be selected during the
day time*4; while negative pattern will be
used during the night time*4.
Positive: Positive pattern of the display.
Font Type You can select the font type used on the display.
Font type 1 [Initial] O 2
Tag On: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information display
Tag display while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].
Off: Cancels.
IF Band Auto: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to
Intermediate reduce interference noises between close
frequency filter stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference noises from
adjacent stations, but sound quality will
not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
AreaChange US [Initial]; When using in North/Central/
TUNER
Tuner channel South America. AM/FM intervals are set to

interval 10 kHz/200 kHz.
SA When using in South American countries
where FM interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is
set to 10 kHz.
EU When using in any other areas. AM/FM
intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz
during auto search).
Sirius ID*5 The 12-digits SIRIUS identification number appears on the
SIRIUS ID display, [28].
20
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 20 5/12/05 4:53:31 pm

Ext Input*6 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [11], a
ENGLISH
External input JVC compatible satellite (SIRIUS/XM) tuner,
[28], an Apple iPod, or a JVC D. player, [32].
Ext In: To use any other external component than
the above, [34].
Beep On: [Initial]; Activates the key-touch tone.
Key-touch tone Off: Deactivates the key-touch tone.
Telephone*7 Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO
Telephone muting sounds while using a cellular phone.

Off: [Initial]; Cancels.
• If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as
the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.
Amp Gain You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Amplifier gain High PWR: [Initial]; Volume 00 – Volume 50
control Low PWR: Volume 00 – Volume 30 (Select this if the
maximum power of the speaker is less than
50 W to prevent them from being damaged.)
Off*7: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Color Sel [Initial: All Source]; You can select your favorite display color
Color selection for each source (or for all sources), [25].
Color Set You can create your own colors, and select them for the
display color, [26].
COLOR
Day Color: User color during the day time*4.

NightColor: User color during the night time*4.
Red +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Green +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
Blue +00 – +11 [Initial: Day Color: +07, NightColor: +05]
*3 Adjustable only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
*4 Depends on the “Dimmer” setting.
*5 Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.
*6 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, USB, or LINE IN (only
for KD-AR870).
21
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 21 9/12/05 9:51:49 am

• To download the file(s), see the following.
Graphic displays • To delete the file(s), see pages 23 and 24.
• To activate the file(s), see page 25.
ENGLISH
Before starting the following procedure,

prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures)
and animations (movies).
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in IMPORTANT:
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
download your own images and animations. included in the “Manual” folder on the
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) supplied CD-ROM.
These images/animation will be shown during • Still images (pictures) and animations
playing a source. (movie) should have the following
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures extension code in their file names:
and movies. – jtl: for large size still images
Picture: 30 still images each – jtm: for small size still images
Movie: 60 frames each – jta: for large size animations
– jtb: for small size animations
Basic procedure – jtw: for Image Link (see pages 13 and 19)
• Before you download or delete the files,
• When appears on the display, you can observe the following:
move back to the previous display by pressing – Do not download a file while driving.
number button 3. – Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
• When / appears on the display, while downloading or deleting a file.*
you can move to the other lists by pressing – Do not detach the control panel while
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. downloading or deleting a file.*
– Do not attach or detach a USB memory
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied while downloading a file.*
CD-ROM. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
will not be done correctly.
2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 18.

Downloading pictures or an animation
• In step 2, select “MOVIE.”
• In step 3, select “Pict.” • It takes a long time to download an
animation. For details, see page 37.
• To activate the downloaded files, see page 25.
3 Select an item.
1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left column.

• In step 3, select “Download.”
4 Select a picture size.
or
The display goes to the PICT menu.
22

2 8 • To download more pictures from
the same folder, repeat steps 5 to 7.
ENGLISH
• To download more pictures from
another folder, press number button
3( ). Then, repeat steps 3 to 7.
“File Check” appears and then the Folder

List appears on the display.
Deleting the files
Deleting the stored animation
3 Select a folder. 1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on page 22.
• In step 3, select “Delete.”
4 Display the File List.
5 Select a file.
EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
step 4 on page 22
3 Delete the animation.

6 Confirm the selection.
EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected 4 Exit from the setting.
7 Download the file.
23
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 23 9/12/05 10:49:36 am

Deleting the stored pictures 4 Exit from the setting.
ENGLISH
2 Deleting all the stored files

The File List appears on the display.
3 • To delete one of the stored pictures

1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press
number button 1 ( ) to confirm EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
the selection. step 4 on page 22
3 Delete all the stored files.

EX.: When “File1 Na” is selected
delete the selected file.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more
pictures. 4 Exit from the setting.
• To delete all the stored pictures

EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in step 4 on page

22
delete all the stored pictures.
24
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 24 9/12/05 10:49:42 am

Activating the downloaded files
Setting the time for dimmer
ENGLISH
• In step 3, select “Set.”
number button 3.
2 Select the display type.
• In step 2, select “DISPLAY.”
• In step 3, select “Dimmer.”
2 Select “Time Set.”

step 4 on page 22 and “Movie”
is selected
Movie Your edited animation stored

in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 3 Adjust the dimmer time.
to step 3. 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
Picture One of your edited still images time.
stored in “Picture” is activated. 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
\ Go to step 3. the control dial to set the dimmer end
Slideshow All stored still images are time.
activated and shown in
sequence (UserSlide). 4 Exit from the setting.
• If no still image is stored,
beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*
Changing the display color

You can select your favorite display color for
each source (or all sources).
The unit returns to the playback display.
• To display the activated files, see page 8. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
* If no still image or no animation is stored, you
can only select “Default.”

25
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 25 9/12/05 10:49:44 am

Setting the display color 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color
for each source (except when selecting
ENGLISH
“All Source” in step 3).

• In step 2, select “COLOR.”
• In step 3, select “Color Sel.”
2
Creating your own color—User Color

3 Select a source. You can create your own colors—“Day Color”
or “NightColor.”

All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or • In step 3, select “Color Set.”
Ext In*2) O LINE IN*3O USB*4 O FM
O AM O Sirius*4/XM*4 O Ipod*4/
D.PLAYER*4 O (back to the beginning)
2 Select “Day Color” or “NightColor.”
*1 When you select “All Source,” you can use

the same color for all the sources.
*2 Depends on the “Ext Input” setting, see
page 21.
*4 Displayed only when the target
component is connected.
4 Select a color.
3 Select a primary color.
Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves

O Grass O Apple O Rose O Amber
O Honey O Violet O Grape O Pale O
User*5 O (back to the beginning)
4 Adjust the level (+00 to +11) of the
*4 The color changes every 2 seconds. selected primary color.
*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and
“NightColor” will be applied (see right
column for details).
26
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 26 16/12/05 12:00:40 pm

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other 2 Display the TITLE input screen.
primary colors.
ENGLISH
3 Assign a title.
1 Press number button 4 ( )
Title assignment repeatedly to select a character set.
You can assign titles to station frequencies, CDs

(both in the unit and the CD changer), and
external components (Ext In).
Maximum number of
Sources
characters
2 Turn the control dial to select a
FM/AM tuner Up to 10 characters (up to 30 character.
station frequencies including • For available characters, see page 38.
both FM and AM)
3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
CDs/CD-CH*1 Up to 32 characters (up to (or previous) character position.
30 discs)
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
External Up to 8 characters entering the title.
components
(“EXT IN” or
“LINE IN”*2) 4 Store the title.
*1 You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or

MP3/WMA/USB.

move back to the previous display by pressing To erase the entire title
number button 3.
In step 3 above...
1 Select the sources.

• For FM/AM tuner: Tune into a station.
• For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.
• For CDs in the CD changer: Select
“CD-CH,” then select a disc number.
• For external components: Select “EXT IN”
(see page 21) or “LINE IN.”
27
EN16-27KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 27 5/12/05 4:53:45 pm

GCI (Global Control Information) update:
Satellite radio operations • If channels are updated after subscription,
updating starts automatically.
ENGLISH
This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready The following appears and no sound can be
—compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio heard.
and XM Satellite radio. – For SIRIUS Satellite radio: “Channels
Updating XX%* Completed”
Before operating your satellite radio: – For XM Satellite radio: “UPDATING”
• For connection, see Installation/Connection • Update takes a few minutes to complete.
Manual (separate volume). • During update, you cannot operate your
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with satellite radio.
your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite
radio. * Changes every 20% of update is completion,
(ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).
• “SIRIUS ” and the SIRIUS dog logo are
registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Activate your SIRIUS subscription after
Inc. connection:
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered
1
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all
related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS
Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,
Inc.
2
Listening to the satellite radio

Connect either one of the following (separately
purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of this unit. JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS
• JVC SIRIUS radio DLP—Down Link channels.
Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio. Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the
• XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box—Using a preset channel, CH184.
JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100:
not supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite 3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 20.
radio.
4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at
<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to
activate your subscription, or you can
call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-
SIRIUS (7474).
“Subscription Updated Press Any Key to
Continue” appears on the display once
subscription has been completed.
28
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 28 5/12/05 4:54:01 pm

Activate your XM subscription after 2
connection:
ENGLISH
• Only channel 0, 1, and 247 are available
before activation.
Signal strength bar increases as the receiving signal

improves. If no signal is received, no bars are displayed.
2 3 Select a category.
XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box starts

updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1” You can tune in to all the channels of every
is tuned in automatically. category by selecting “ALL.”
Selecting a particular category (SPORTS,
3 Check your XM Satellite radio ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to
ID labelled on the casing of the enjoy only the channels from the selected
XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box, or category.
tune in to “Channel 0” (see page 30).
• Holding either of the buttons can display
4 Contact XM Satellite radio on the category list (see page 31).
the internet at <http://xmradio.
comactivation/> to activate your 4 Select a channel for listening.
subscription, or you can call 1-800-
XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one
of the available channels (Channel 4 or
higher). • Holding either of the buttons changes the
channel rapidly.
• When changing the category or channel,

Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio invalid and unsubscribed channels are
skipped.
1
Listening to the XM Satellite radio

1

29
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 29 5/12/05 4:54:04 pm

2 If no operation is done for about 15
seconds, Category Search is canceled
( goes off).
ENGLISH
• While searching, invalid and

3 Select a channel for listening. unsubscribed channels are skipped.
Checking the XM Satellite radio ID

• Holding either of the buttons changes the While selecting “XM1,” “XM2,” or
channel rapidly. “XM3,” select “Channel 0.”
Searching for category/channel

You can search for programs by category
(Category Search) or channel number (Channel The display shows “RADIO ID ” and the 8-digit
Search). (alphanumeric) ID number.
• In Category Search, you can tune in to the
channels of the selected category. Category To cancel the ID number display, select any
Search begins from the currently selected channel other than “Channel 0.”
channel. The selected channel number flashes
on the display.
• In Channel Search, you can tune in to
all channels (including non-categorised Storing stations in memory
channels).
You can preset six stations for each band.
1 Select a category (Category Search). • When appears on the display, you can
number button 3.
• For Channel Search, skip • When / appears on the display,
this step. you can move to the other lists by pressing
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly.
Ex.: Storing a SIRIUS channel into preset
number 4 of the SR1 band.
2 Select a channel for listening.
1 Tune in to a channel you want to
listen to.
• By holding BAND button, the Preset
Channel List will appear (go to step 5 on
page 31).
EX.: When “Country” is selected for the Category Search
30
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 30 9/12/05 10:04:20 am

2
Selecting a category/channel on
the list
ENGLISH
3 Select “List.” • When appears on the display, you can
number button 3.
• When / appears on the display,
you can move to the other lists by pressing
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly.
4 Select “Preset.”
Ex.: When listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio.
1 • To select a category
• In step 4, select “Category.”
5 Select a preset number you want to The first channel of the selected category
store into. is tuned in.
• Holding 5 / ∞ can also show the
Category List while listening to a
channel.
2 Select a category.
6 Store the channel.
• To Select a channel
Listening to a user channel 1 Follow steps 2 to 4 on left culumn.
• In step 4, select “Channel.”
1 Display the Preset Channel list, then
select the preset number you want to
listen to.
2 Change to the selected channel.

31
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 31 12/29/05 8:40:28 AM

2 Select a channel. • For connection, see Installation/Connection
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied
ENGLISH
with the interface adapter.
Caution:
Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the
vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting
or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.
2 Change to the selected item.
Preparations:
Make sure “Changer” is selected for the external
input setting (see page 21).
To change the display information while ~

listening to a channel
Ÿ
Category name and channel name = Artist/
composer* name and song/program name
= Small graphic screen = Large graphic
screen = Audio level meter = (back to the
Playback starts automatically from where
beginning)
it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped
(for D. player) previously.
* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.
! Adjust the volume.
iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod
or a JVC D. player from the control panel. ⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.
(See pages 16 – 18.)
Before operating your iPod or D. player: • Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
Connect either one of the following (separately D. player is deactivated.
of this unit.
• Interface adapter for iPod®—KS-PD100 for
controlling an iPod.
• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for
controlling a D. player.
32
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 32 5/12/05 4:54:09 pm

To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for 3 Confirm the selection.
D. player) playback
ENGLISH
To move back to the previous
menu, press 5.
• To resume playback, press it again. • If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you
To fast-forward or reverse the track
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3
until the desired track is played.
• Holding 4/¢ can skips 10
items at a time.
To go to the next or previous tracks

1
2 Select your desired playback mode.

Selecting a track from the menu
7 Repeat play
1 Enter the main menu.
Now the 4/¢ buttons work as

the menu selecting buttons.*
Mode Plays repeatedly
2 Select the desired menu. One: Functions the same as “Repeat
One” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode = One” for the D. player
[ ].
All: Functions the same as “Repeat
For iPod: All” of the iPod or “Repeat
Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs Mode = All” for the D. player
O Genres O Composers O (back to the [ ].
beginning) Off: Cancels.
For D. player:
Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
Track O (back to the beginning)
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
33
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 33 12/12/05 2:53:02 pm

7 Random play
~ For KD-AR870
ENGLISH
• LINE IN: For selecting the external

Mode Plays at random component connected to the LINE IN
plugs.
Song: Functions the same as “Shuffle
• EXIT IN: For selecting the external
Songs” of the iPod [ ] or
component connected to the CD
“Random Play = On” of the
changer jack.
D. player [ ].
Album*: Functions the same as “Shuffle
Albums” of the iPod [ ]. For KD-G820
Off: Cancels.
* For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
in “Albums” of the main
“MENU.”
If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 21
• You can also cancel the playback mode by and select the external input (“Ext In”).
Ÿ Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.
operations ! Adjust the volume.
For KD-AR870:
You can connect an external component to the
LINE IN plugs on the rear.
For KD-AR870/KD-G820:
You can connect an external component to
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
pages 16 – 18.)
the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line
Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX
Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Before operating the external component, select
the external input correctly (see page 21).
• For listening to the USB memory, see page 12.

• For listening to an iPod or a D. player, see
pages 32 – 34.
34
EN28-35KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 34 12/12/05 2:53:06 pm

• If you change the source, playback also stops.
More about this unit Next time you select the same playback source
again, playback starts from where it has been
ENGLISH
stopped previously.
Basic operations
Turning on the power Inserting a disc
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
turn on the power. If the source is ready, Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
playback also starts. the disc.
• Do not insert 8 cm (3-3/16") discs (single CD)
Turning off the power and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.)
• If you turn off the power while listening to a into the loading slot.
disc, disc play will start from where playback
has been stopped previously, next time you Playing a disc
turn on the power. • While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start assigned to the audio CD (see page 27), it will
from the first track of the current folder if be shown on the display.
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is • While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
activated (see page 19). or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
sounds.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• During SSM search... • Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
– All previously stored stations are erased and • This unit can play back only files of the same
stations are stored newly. type which are first detected if a disc includes
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). WMA files.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in • This unit can play back multi-session discs;
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
• When storing a station manually, the while playing.
previously preset station is erased when a new • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played
station is stored in the same preset number. back on this unit because of their disc
characteristics, or for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
Disc operations – Moisture condensation occurs on the lens
Caution for DualDisc playback inside the unit.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does – The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital – CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non- written with “Packet Write” method.
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may – There are improper recording conditions
not be recommended. (missing data, etc.) or media conditions
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).
General • CD-RWs may require a longer readout time
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than
• This unit has been designed to reproduce that of regular CDs.
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
MP3 and WMA formats.
35

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs: • This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
seal stuck to the surface. • This unit cannot play back the following files:
ENGLISH
– Discs on which labels can be directly – MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
printed by an ink jet printer. MP3 PRO format.
Using these discs under high temperatures or – MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
high humidities may cause malfunctions or format.
damage to the unit. – MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless,
Playing an MP3/WMA disc professional, and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
Windows Media® Audio.
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– Files which have the data such as WAVE,
• This unit can show the names of albums,
ATRAC3, etc.
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,
• The search function works but search speed is
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA
not constant.
files.
• This unit can display only one-byte
characters. No other characters can be Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory
correctly displayed. • While playing from a USB memory, the
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files playback order may differ from other players.
meeting the conditions below: • This unit may be unable to play back some
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps USB memories or some files due to their
– Sampling frequency: characteristics or recording conditions.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) • Depending on the shape of the USB memories
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2) and connection ports, some USB memories
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, may not be attached properly or the
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name connection might be loose.
• The maximum number of characters for file/ • It is not recommended to use a USB memory
folder names vary among the disc format used wider than 20 mm (13/16") as it will block you
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or from pressing the 0 button.
<.wma>). • If the connected USB memory does not have
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters the correct files, “No Files” appears and the
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters unit returns to the previous source.
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters • This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72) • This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
characters meeting the conditions below:
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum – Bit rate:
number of characters for file/folder names in MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)
case the total number of files and folders is 8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
313 or more. WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
(variable bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
in elapsed time display, and do not show
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
performing the search function, this
difference becomes noticeable.
36
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 36 17/12/05 3:23:45 pm

– Sampling frequency: Graphic display
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) General
ENGLISH
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz • You can display two sizes of pictures and
(MPEG-2.5) animations.
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in the animations;
VBR (variable bit rate). The image is displayed with the
• The maximum number of characters for dimension of the screen.
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 – SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. for animations;
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files The image is displayed like a
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). CD jacket (on the left side of the
display).
Image Link • Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
longer time to show it on the display.
• Image Link will not work in the following
cases:
– If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/ Downloading (or deleting) files
WMA folder. • You can download a file only while selecting
– If Intro play is activated. “CD” for the playback source; on the other
– If the source is changed to another from hand, you can delete a file while selecting any
“CD.” source.
• If more than one <jtw> file are included in a • After finishing the procedure to download a
folder, a file with the youngest file number is file, playback starts from the beginning.
used for Image Link. • If you have already downloaded an animation,
downloading a new animation deletes the
Ejecting a disc previously stored animation.
• It takes a long time to download an
• If the ejected disc is not removed within
animation.
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
– About 3 to 4 seconds for a still image (one
again into the loading slot to protect it from
frame).
dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
– About 1 to 2 minutes for an animation of 30
frames.
Sound adjustment – About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
General frames.
• If you try to operate the downloading
• If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
procedure from a disc without any <jtl>,
fader level to the center (“00”).
<jtm>, <jta>, and <jtb> files, beeps sound.
• Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
• If you try to store more than 30 images
subwoofer is connected.
for each size “LARGE” and “SMALL,”
• You cannot change the input level—
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start
“VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
downloading. Delete unwanted files before
adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
downloading.
• If the total frame number of an animation
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding
that number are ignored.

37

General settings—PSM Satellite radio operations
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work • You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio
ENGLISH
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS
those having a control dial for dimming. In radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any the CD changer jack on the rear.
other than “Auto.” By turning on/off the power of the unit, you
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you
pattern will change to the “Positive” or cannot control it from this unit.
“Negative” pattern depending on the • To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or
“Dimmer” setting. to sign up, visit «http://www.sirius.com».
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from • For the latest channel listings and
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level programming information, or to sign up for
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit XM Satellite radio, visit «http://www.xmradio.
automatically changes the volume level to com».
“Volume 30.”
iPod or D. player operations
Title assignment • When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 D. player is charged through this unit.
station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name • While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before operations from the iPod or D. player are
assignment. disabled. Perform all operations from this
• Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can unit.
also be shown if you play back the disc from • The text information may not be displayed
the unit and vice versa. correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters
Available characters on the display cannot be shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of
Capital letters
communication between the iPod or
D. player and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than
8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
Small letters
also page 19). This unit can display up to 40
characters.
Notice:
Numbers and symbols
When operating an iPod or D. player,
some operations may not be performed
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the
following JVC web site:
For iPod users:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>
For D. player users:
38
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 38 9/12/05 9:49:28 am

To keep discs clean
Maintenance A dirty disc may not play correctly.
ENGLISH
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
How to clean the connectors with a soft cloth in a straight line
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the from center to edge.
connectors. • Do not use any solvent (for example,
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to
damage the connectors. To play new discs
New discs may have some rough
spots around the inner and outer
edges. If such a disc is used, this
unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges
Connector with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the Do not use the following discs:
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
Warped disc
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until Sticker Sticker residue
the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs Stick-on label

When removing a disc from Center holder
its case, press down the center
holder of the case and lift the disc
out, holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
the disc around the center holder (with the
printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.
39
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 39 5/12/05 6:04:35 pm

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
speakers. • Check the cords and connections.
General
• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• “Connect Error” appears on the Remove the control panel, wipe the connector,
display. then attach it again (see page 2).
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually.
FM/AM
work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the antenna firmly.
radio.
• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
back. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot which you used for recording.
be skipped.
Disc playback
• Disc can be neither played back nor • Unlock the disc (see page 15).
ejected. • Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc cannot be recognized (“No Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
Disc,” “Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in
MP3/WMA playback
the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
the file names.
• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not
add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to
non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
40
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 40 9/12/05 10:04:59 am

ENGLISH
• A longer readout time is required Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
(“File Check” keeps flashing on the
display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are
you have intended them to play. recorded.
MP3/WMA playback
• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs while playing. This is
caused by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• “Not Support” appears on the display Skip to the next track encoded in an appropriate
and track skips. format or to the next non-copy-protected WMA
track.
• “NO MUSIC” appears on the display. Change the disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can only display letters (capital: A – Z,
(e.g. album name). small: a – z), numbers, and a limited number of
symbols (see page 38).
• Noise is generated. The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track.
Skip to another file. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
USB memory playback
tracks.)
• “File Check” keeps flashing on the • Readout time varies depending on the USB
display. memory.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
• “No Files” appears on the display. Attach a USB memory that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate format.
• “Not Support” appears on the display The track is unplayable.
and track skips.

41
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 41 5/12/05 6:04:37 pm

ENGLISH
• “Read Failed” appears on the display, • The attached USB memory may be
then returns to the previous source. malfunctioning, or may not have been
formatted correctly.
The files included in the USB memory are
corrupted.
USB memory playback
• Do not pull out or attach the USB memory

repeatedly while “File Check” appears on the
display.
• While playing a track, sound is MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied
sometimes interrupted. into the USB memory.
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB
memory, and try again.
• “No Disc” appears on the display. Insert a disc into the magazine.
• “No Magazine” appears on the Insert the magazine.
display.
CD changer
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly
and press the reset button of the CD changer.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Press the reset button of the CD changer.
the display.
• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).
• Download does not seem to finish. It takes quite a long time to download an
animation with many frames (see page 37).
• Animation does not move. Wait until the operating temperature resumes.
PICT—PSM
• The display graphic function does

not work correctly.
• You cannot select an image or Select an image only after downloading the
animation for “Set” in “Pict.” appropriate files in memory.
(“Default” cannot be changed for
“Movie” and “Picture, ” or beeps
sound for “Slideshow.”)
42
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 42 5/12/05 6:04:38 pm

ENGLISH
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page
SUBSCRIBE” scrolls on the display 28).
while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio.
• No sound can be heard. The unit is updating the channel information and
“Channel Updating XX%* it takes a few minutes to complete.
Completed” appears on the display.
• Either “No Signal” or “NO SIGNAL” Move to an area where signals are stronger.
• Either “No Antenna” or “CHECK Connect the antenna firmly.
ANTENNA” appears on the display.
• “Invalid Channel” appears on the No broadcast on the selected channel.
display for about 5 seconds, then Select another channel or continue listening to
returns to the previous display while the previous channel.
listening to the SIRIUS Satellite
radio.
Satellite radio
• “No Name” appears or scrolls on the No text information for the selected channel.
display while listening to the SIRIUS
Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
• “---” appears on the display for Selected channel is no longer available or is
about 2 seconds, then returns to the unauthorized.
previous channel while listening to Select another channel or continue listening to
the XM Satellite radio. the previous channel.
• “OFF AIR” appears on the display Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.
while listening to the XM Satellite
radio.
• “LOADING” appears on the display Select another channel or continue listening to
while listening to the XM Satellite the previous channel.
radio.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. The unit is loading the channel information
and audio. Text information are temporarily
unavailable.
• Satellite radio does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio
correctly and reset this unit.
* Changes every 20% of update is completion, (ex. 20%, 40%, 60%).

43
EN36-45KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 43 9/12/05 9:49:32 am

ENGLISH
• The iPod or D. player does not turn • Check the connecting cable and its connection.
on or does not work. • Update the firmware version.
• Change the battery.
• Buttons do not work as intended. The functions of the buttons have been changed.
Press MODE before performing the operation.
• The sound is distorted. Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the
iPod/D. player.
• “Disconnect” appears on the display. Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Playback stops. The headphones are disconnected during
iPod/D. player playback
playback. Restart the playback operation using

the control panel (see pages 32 and 33).
• No sound can be heard when Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
connecting an iPod nano.
• No sound can be heard. Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,
• “Error 01” appears on the display connect it again.
when connecting a D. player.
• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or
appears on the display. D. player.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and
the display. iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Check the connection between the adapter and
this unit.
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.
not work after disconnecting from
this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
44

Specifications
ENGLISH
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION
Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
4 Ω and ≤ 1% THD+N pickup (semiconductor laser)
Signal to Noise Ratio: Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)
Dynamic Range: 96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
Tone Control Range: MP3 Decoding Format:
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz) MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
17.5 kHz) Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Line-In Level/Impedance: Playable USB memory:
KD-AR870: 1.5V/20kΩ load Format: FAT 12/16/32
Line-Out Level/Impedance: Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
KD-AR870: 5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale) Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
KD-G820: 4.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale) GENERAL
Other Terminals: Power Requirement:
CD changer, LINE IN (for KD-AR870) Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
TUNER SECTION Grounding System: Negative ground
Allowable Operating Temperature:
Frequency Range:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Dimensions (W × H × D):
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz
Installation Size (approx.):
or 200 kHz)
182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(7-3/16" × 2-1/16" × 6")
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
Panel Size (approx.):
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
(7-7/16" × 2-5/16" × 7/16")
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Mass (approx.):
1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) (excluding accessories)
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω) Design and specifications are subject to change
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: without notice.
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz telephone directory for the nearest car audio
Stereo Separation: 35 dB speciality shop.
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity: 20 μV
Selectivity: 35 dB
45

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Still having trouble??
USA ONLY
Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!
EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited 0106DTSMDTJEIN
Rear_KD-AR870_820[J]1.indd 2 5/12/05 4:54:37 pm

KD-AR870/KD-G820
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
GET0359-002A 0106DTSMDTJEIN
[J] EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous
dealers. adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
automóviles.
WARNINGS ADVERTENCIAS AVERTISSEMENTS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements
installing the unit. antes de instalar la unidad. électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after • Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis • Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
installation. del automóvil después de la instalación. cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.
Notes: Notas: Remarques:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows • Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el • Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer. fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles. • Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with • Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une
an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
50 W, change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager
being damaged (see page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS). “Amp Gain” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 21 vos enceintes (voir page 21 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES). • Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
with insulating tape. • Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it aislante. • Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
when removing this unit. • El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.
Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la
connections: fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces: connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de • NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged. alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the producirse graves daños en la unidad. sérieusement endommagé.
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car. • ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del • AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
automóvil.
Parts list for installation and connection Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún raccordement
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately. elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles. manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A/B C D
Hard case/Control panel Sleeve Trim plate
Estuche duro/Panel de control Cubierta Placa de guarnición
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande Manchon Plaque d’assemblage
E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")
Cordón de alimentación Arandela (ø5) Tuerca de seguridad (M5) Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pulgada)
Cordon d’alimentation Rondelle (ø5) Ecrou d’arrêt (M5) Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pouces)
I J K L M
Rubber cushion Handles Remote controller Battery CD-ROM (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Cojín de goma Manijas Control remoto Pila CD-ROM (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Amortisseur en caoutchouc Poignées Télécommade Pile CD-ROM (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Instal1-2_KDAR870G820[J]2.indd 1 9/12/05 12:00:37 pm

INSTALLATION INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL INSTALLATION (MONTAGE
(IN-DASH MOUNTING) TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS) DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits. instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.
by a qualified technician. • Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad, • Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado. faire installer par un technicien qualifié.
Do the required electrical connections.

Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
*1 When you stand the unit,

be careful not to damage the
fuse on the rear.
*1 Al poner la unidad vertical,
tenga cuidado de no dañar
el fusible provisto en la parte
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
posterior.
sleeve firmly in place.
*1 Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil
à la verticale, faire attention
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para
de ne pas endommager le retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.
fusible situé sur l’arrière. Tordez les languettes appropriées pour
maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit Extracción de la unidad Retrait de l’appareil

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera. Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración
para poder desmontar la unidad.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon
option In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall Stay (option) En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.
Tabique a prueba de incendios Soporte (opción) Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Cloison Hauban (en option)
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm *2 Not supplied for this unit.
(M5 × 3/8")*2 *2 No suministrado con esta unidad.
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm *2 Non fourni avec cet appareil.
Dashboard (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2 Bracket*2
Tablero de instrumentos Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm Ménsula*2
Tableau de bord (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Screw (option) Support*2
Tornillo (opción) Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2
Vis (en option) Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm
Pocket (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2
Compartimiento Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Poche Bracket*2
Ménsula*2
Support*2
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Nota : Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚. Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚. (3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
TROUBLESHOOTING LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• The fuse blows. • El fusible se quema. • Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados? * Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on. • No es posible conectar la alimentación. • L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado? * Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers. • No sale sonido de los altavoces. • Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted. • El sonido presenta distorsión. • Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una * Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
masa común? à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using • Perturbación de ruido. • Interférence avec les sons.
shorter and thicker cords? * ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil * La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso? voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • La unidad se calienta. • L’appareil devient chaud.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una * Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
• This unit does not work at all.
masa común? à la masse?
* Have you reset your unit?
• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto. • Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* ¿Reinicializó el receptor? * Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
2
Instal1-2_AR870G820[J]f.indd 2 12/28/05 12:01:15 PM

ENGLISH ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
A Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit. vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad. sérieusement l’appareil.
body may be different in color. Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
specified in the illustration below. en color. 1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
2 Connect the antenna cord. 1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo. 2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
2 Conecte el cable de antena. 3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.
To subwoofer (see diagram )
LINE IN— only for KD-AR870 (see diagram ) Al subwoofer (véase diagrama )
sólo para KD-AR870 (véase diagrama ) Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme )
seulement pour le KD-AR870 (voir le diagramme )
Antenna connector
Conector de antena
Connecteur d’antenne 15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A *1 Not supplied for this unit. Ignition switch
*1 No suministrado con esta unidad. Interruptor de encendido
Rear ground terminal
*1 Non fourni avec cet appareil. Interrupteur d’allumage
Terminal de tierra
posterior Black
Borne arrière de masse Negro
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Noir
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Line out (see diagram ) Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Salida de línea (véase diagrama )
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )
Yellow*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
Amarillo*2
To external components (see diagram ) the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Jaune*2 A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
To external components (see diagram )
To external components (see diagram ) automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
Red (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant) Fuse block
Rojo Bloque de fusibles
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block Porte-fusible
Rouge
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Blue with white stripe
turned on. Azul con rayas blancas To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)
*2 Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa Bleu avec bande blanche Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.
(200 mA max.)
*2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant Orange with white stripe
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut Naranja con rayas blancas
pas être mis sous tension. Orange avec bande blanche To car light control switch
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil
Brown À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Marrón
Marrone To cellular phone system—only for KD-AR870
Al sistema de teléfono celular—sólo para KD-AR870
Al cellulare—seulement pour le KD-AR870
White with black stripe White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black stripe Green Purple with black stripe Purple
Blanco con rayas negras Blanco Gris con rayas negras Gris Verde con rayas negras Verde Púrpura con rayas negras Púrpura
Blanc avec bande noire Blanc Gris avec bande noire Gris Vert avec bande noire Vert Violet avec bande noire Violet
Left speaker (front) Right speaker (front) Left speaker (rear) Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (delantero) Altavoz derecho (delantero) Altavoz izquierdo (trasero) Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (avant) Enceinte droit (avant) Enceinte gauche (arrière) Enceinte droit (arrière)
C Connecting other external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs
JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod®, or JVD D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM,
iPod® de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod® Apple ou lecteur D. JVC
• Set “Changer” for external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “Changer” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 21 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 21 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur
• For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP en la ilustración de abajo. l’illustration.
—Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit. • Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link • Pour écouter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP
• The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor. JVC —Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu séparément) à cet
adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for • Puede conectar el iPod*5 o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador appareil.
D. player). de interfaz (no suministrado)—KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500 • Le iPod*5 ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un
(para el reproductor D.). adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou
KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Conexión 1 (conexión integrada) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)
Apple iPod (separately JVC D. player (separately

purchased) purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido Reproductor D. JVC
or
JVC DLP JVC CD changer separadamente) (adquirido separadamente)
o
DLP JVC Cambiador de CD de JVC iPod Apple (vendu Lecteur D. JVC (vendu
ou
Processeur DLP JVC Changeur de CD JVC séparément) séparément)
• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC Smart
Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).
CD changer jack • Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un
Jack para el cambiador de CD adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).
Prise du changeur CD • Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirect™ (vendu séparément) à cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur
numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni). Antenna (supplied with XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box)
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect™)
To CD changer, KS-PD100, or KS-PD500 XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box

Al cambiador de CD, KS-PD100 o KS-PD500 Sintonizador universal XMDirect™
Au changeur de CD, KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500 Tuner universel XMDirect™

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos / Connexion
d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system. Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote de su automóvil. système autoradio.
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through • Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor • Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
this unit. remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the unidad. puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused. • Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les
– Only for KD-AR870: You can switch off the built-in amplifier amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil
and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier(s) to quedan sin usar. inutilisés.
get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the – Sólo para KD-AR870: Podrá desconectar el amplificador – Uniquement pour le KD-AR870: Vous pouvez mettre hors service
unit. See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume). incorporado y enviar las señales de audio solamente al(los) l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux audio uniquement
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener sonidos nítidos y evitar sur un ou plusieurs amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un
hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit. que se caliente el interior de la unidad. Consulte la página 21 del son clair et d’éviter tout échauffement interne de l’autoradio. Voir
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES (volumen separado). page 21 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).
down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the – El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece alto para que – Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un
best performance from this unit. corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad reproducidos por niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons
esta unidad. reproduits par cet appareil.
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à
disminuya el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para cet appareil, diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur
obtener un óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad. extérieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
Remote lead
Cable remoto Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas) Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Rear speakers Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Altavoces posteriores blanche) Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Enceintes arrière
JVC Amplifier To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Amplificador de JVC Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere
JVC Amplificateur Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il
y en a une
JVC Amplifier
Front speakers Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplifier
Altavoces delanteros Front speakers JVC Amplificateur
Amplificador de JVC Subwoofer
Enceintes avant JVC Amplificateur Altavoces delanteros
Subwoofer
Enceintes avant
Caisson de grave
*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the
wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
*3 Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo
contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad. *4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la *4 Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)
peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement. *4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Conexión 2 (conexión alternativa) /Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)

CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador de CD / Prise du changeur CD
Apple iPod (separately
purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido JVC D. player (separately
separadamente) purchased)
iPod Apple (vendu or Reproductor D. JVC
JVC DLP or JVC CD changer o (adquirido separadamente)
o séparément)
DLP JVC Cambiador de CD de JVC ou Lecteur D. JVC (vendu
Processeur DLP JVC ou Changeur de CD JVC séparément)
Antenna (supplied with XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box) CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal Before connecting the external components,
XMDirect™) make sure that the unit is turned off.
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect™) Antes de conectar los componentes externos,
XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Box asegúrese de que la unidad esté apagada.
Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,
Tuner universel XMDirect™ assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.
*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. *6 Connecting cord supplied with your JVC CD changer or DLP *7 Signal cord supplied with your Smart Digital Adapter
*5 iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países. *6 Conexión del cable suministrado para su cambiador de CD o DLP JVC *7 Cable de señal suministrado con el adaptador Smart Digital
*5 iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans *6 Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD ou processeur *7 Cordon de signal fourni avec votre adaptateur numérique
les autres pays. DLP JVC intelligent
*8 Audio signal cord supplied with your Smart Digital Adapter. Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil
*8 Cable de señal de audio suministrado con el adaptador Smart Digital
extérieur
*8 Cordon audio fourni avec votre adaptateur numérique intelligent
JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (Plug and Play) JVC / PnP (Plug and Play) JVC External component
Componente exterior
• Set “Ext In” for external input setting (See page 21 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione Appareil extérieur
“Ext In” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página 21 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page 21 du External component
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.) Componente exterior
You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter, KS-U100K (not CD changer jack Appareil extérieur
supplied). Jack para el cambiador de CD
• Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP. Prise du changeur CD 3.5 mm stereo mini plug
También podrá conectar la PnP JVC a través de este receptor utilizando el adaptador para radio SIRIUS Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm
JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado). Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm
• Al encender/apagar el receptor también se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.
Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC à cet autoradio en utilisant l’adaptateur de radio SIRIUS JVC KS- *9 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
U100K (non fourni). *9 Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
• Mettre sous/hors tension l’autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC. *9 Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet appareil)
To headphones jack
*10 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
Stereo mini plug
Al jack para auriculares *10 Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Miniclavija estéreo *10 Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
À la prise du casque d’écoute
Fiche stéré mini
Only for KD-AR870/ sólo para KD-AR870/ seulement pour le KD-AR870/
CD power plug To DC IN jack External component

Clavija de alimentación de CC Al jack DC IN Componente exterior
CD changer jack
Fiche d’alimentation CC À la prise DC IN
Jack para el cambiador de CD Appareil extérieur
Prise du changeur CD
4

CD RECEIVER
KD-G824
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0361-001A
[UI]
Cover_KD-G824[UI]1.indd 2 12/23/05 9:45:43 AM


4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit How to use the MODE/SEL button

4/¢ buttons, 5/∞ buttons, and the
mode.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after
pressing MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Works as time countdown indicator.
• If this does not work, reset your unit. To use these controls for original functions
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
of these buttons until the control is cleared.
• Pressing MODE again also restores original
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0°C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be
halted on the display to prevent the display from being blurred. appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, and the operating temperature is resumed, these functions will
start working again.
2
EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 2 12/23/05 9:46:31 AM

How to read this manual
CONTENTS
• Some related tips and notes are explained in Control panel ................................... 4
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
Press briefly. Basic operations ................................................... 6
Radio operations .............................. 7
Press repeatedly. Disc/USB memory operations............. 9
Press either Playing a USB memory ......................................... 10
one.
Press and hold until your General settings — PSM ................... 16
desired response begins. Title assignment............................... 24
Press and hold both
buttons at the same time. Other external component
operations .................................... 26
The following marks are used to indicate... More about this unit ......................... 27
: Built-in CD player operations.
Maintenance .................................... 31
: External CD changer operations. Troubleshooting ............................... 32
: External USB memory operations. Specifications ................................... 35
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, For safety...
dangerous.
Caution on volume setting: complicated operations.
with other sources. Lower the volume Temperature inside the car...
before playing a disc to avoid damaging If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
the speakers by the sudden increase of the or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
output level. the car becomes normal before operating the
unit.
EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 3 12/23/05 9:46:37 AM

Control panel


Lever CAUTION:
EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 4 12/23/05 9:46:38 AM

Installing the lithium coin battery Main elements and features
(CR2025)
Aim the remote controller directly at the 1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is • Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
no obstacle in between. attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning: 2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
explode. • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
• Store the battery in a place where children USB.
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. • While playing an MP3 disc on an
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, MP3-compatible CD changer:
cracking, or starting a fire: – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
– Do not leave the battery with other JVC D. player:
metallic materials. – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or D ∞.
similar tools. – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
when throwing away or saving it. selecting buttons.)*
Caution: 4 SOUND button
equalizer).


5
EN02-05KD-G824[UI]1.indd 5 12/23/05 9:46:39 AM

5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons pages 14 – 16.)
pressed and held. To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
• While listening to an iPod or a D. player To restore the sound, press it
(in menu selecting mode): again.
press D ∞ to confirm the selection.) To turn off the power
held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power. 16 – 18.
1
Ÿ 2-1 Canceling the display

demonstrations
to “Off.”

* You cannot select these sources if they “Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
are not ready or not connected. turn the control dial to adjust the
hour.
! For FM/AM tuner 2 Press ¢ to select “Clock Min”
dial to adjust the minute.
“12Hours” or “24Hours,” time
display mode.
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 6 12/23/05 9:47:02 AM

To check the current clock time when the
power is turned off Radio operations
~
Ÿ
! Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching
stops.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast
lights up on the display.
“SMALL” (CD jacket image) graphic*1 is displayed.
again.
*2
In step ! above...
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. 1
2 Select a desired station frequency.

Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 17).
Goes back to the initial display pattern.
*1 You can use your edited file for graphic screen When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
(see pages 19 – 22). receive
1

7
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 7 12/23/05 9:47:08 AM

2 Manual presetting

3 Exit from the setting. 1

Reception improves, but stereo effect will 2
be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, select “Mono Off”
3
FM station automatic presetting— Using the Preset Station List

SSM (Strong-station Sequential • When appears on the display, you can
Memory) move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
want to store into.
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List
will appear (go to step 4 on page 9).
2
2
3 Select “SSM.”
3 Display the Preset Station List.

band.
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 8 12/23/05 9:47:09 AM

store into. Disc/USB memory
operations
• You can move to the lists of the other FM change the source or eject the disc.
( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly.
Listening to a preset station

1 Playing discs in the CD changer
All discs in the magazine will be played
• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.
want to listen to. ~
or
Using the Preset Station List Ÿ Select a disc.

1 Display the Preset Station List, then
select the preset station you want to
listen to.
2 Change to the selected station. For disc number from 07 – 12:
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 9 12/23/05 9:47:11 AM

USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 18).
Cautions:
10
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 10 12/23/05 9:47:12 AM

For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
11
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 11 12/23/05 9:47:13 AM

number button 3.
1



skip 10 tracks.
*1 Selectable only when the source is selected and vice versa.
“CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the media is MP3,
WMA, or USB. 3
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
12
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 12 12/23/05 9:47:14 AM


procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
13
EN06-13KD-G824[UI]1.indd 13 12/23/05 9:47:15 AM

80 Hz are cut off.
120 Hz are cut off.
C VolAdjust
[–5 to +5]
FM sound level.
D Loudness
well-balanced sound at low volume
3 Adjust the selected setting item. levels. [Off or On]
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to 4 Exit from the setting.
move to the “Fad/Bal” adjustment
display.
by pressing:
4/¢ :
between the left and right (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
speakers. [L06 to R06]
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
1 Press number button 1 ( ) to Available sound modes
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment
display.
14
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 14 12/23/05 9:47:46 AM

1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
To display the rest

frequency.
width.
15
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 15 12/23/05 9:47:52 AM

Preset values
Sound Low Mid High
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz


items listed in the table that follows.
• By pressing either of the buttons

display.

To display the rest
16
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 16 12/23/05 9:47:53 AM

Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
CLOCK
Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]

Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
DISPLAY

legible.

17
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 17 12/23/05 9:47:55 AM

DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
TUNER

remain.
Ext Input*3 Changer: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], an
External input Apple iPod or a JVC D. player, [24].
the above, [26].
Telephone Muting1/Muting2: Select either one which mutes the
AUDIO

• If CD, CD changer, or USB has been selected as the source,
playback pauses during telephone muting.
COLOR

*3 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—TUNER, CD, or USB.
18
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 18 12/23/05 9:47:55 AM


• In step 3, select “Pict.” Downloading pictures or an animation
3 Select an item. • To activate the downloaded files, see page 22.

or

19
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 19 12/23/05 9:47:56 AM

“File Check” flashes and then the Folder List

appears on the display. Deleting the files
3 Select a folder.
2
5 Select a file.
step 4 on page 19

20
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 20 12/23/05 9:47:57 AM






19
21
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 21 12/23/05 9:47:58 AM

number button 3.

is selected

beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*

number button 3.
22
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 22 12/23/05 9:47:59 AM

Setting the display color 6 Exit from the setting.
2 You can create your own colors—“Day Color”

3 Select a source. • In step 3, select “Color Set.”
All Source*1 O CD O Changer (or Ext

In*2) O USB*3 O FM O AM O Ipod*3/

page 18.
4 Select a color.

Every*4 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O Leaves selected primary color.
*4 The color changes every 2 seconds.

“NightColor” will be applied (see right 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
column for details). primary colors.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color 6 Exit from the setting.
23
EN14-23KD-G824[UI]1.indd 23 12/23/05 9:48:00 AM

3 Assign a title.
Title assignment 1 Press number button 4 ( )
repeatedly to select a character set.
Maximum number of
Sources
characters
FM/AM tuner Up to 10 characters (up to 30 2 Turn the control dial to select a
station frequencies including character.
both FM and AM) • For available characters, see page 30.
CDs/CD-CH* Up to 32 characters (up to 3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
30 discs) (or previous) character position.
External Up to 8 characters 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you finish
components entering the title.
* You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or MP3/
WMA/USB. 4 Store the title.

number button 3.
1 Select the sources. To erase the entire title

• For FM/AM tuner: Tune into a station. In step 3 above...
• For external components: Select “Ext In”
(see page 18).
2 Display the TITLE input screen.

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.
Before operating your iPod or D. player:

of this unit.
24
EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 24 12/23/05 9:48:28 AM

• For connection, see Installation/Connection To fast-forward or reverse the track
Caution: To go to the next or previous tracks

Preparations: Selecting a track from the menu

input setting (see page 18). 1 Enter the main menu.
~
Ÿ 2 Select the desired menu.
Playback starts automatically from where For iPod:

it has been paused (for iPod) or stopped Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs
(for D. player) previously. O Genres O Composers O (back to the
beginning)
For D. player:
⁄ Adjust the sound mode as you want.

(See pages 14 – 16.) – When you confirm the selection of a track.
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or
D. player is deactivated.
To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for

D. player) playback
• To resume playback, press it again.

25
EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 25 12/23/05 9:48:34 AM

3 Confirm the selection. 7 Random play

menu, press 5.
• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.
will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 Mode Plays at random
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Selecting the playback modes Albums” of the iPod [ ].
Off: Cancels.
1 * For iPod: Only if you select “All Albums”
“MENU.”
7 Repeat play pressing number button 4 ( ) in step 2.

operations
Mode Plays repeatedly You can connect an external component to
One: Functions the same as “Repeat
[ ].
All” of the iPod or “Repeat
Mode = All” for the D. player
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

and select the external input (“Ext In”).
26
EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 26 12/23/05 9:48:34 AM

Disc operations
and start playing the source. Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does
! Adjust the volume. not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
pages 14 – 16.)
More about this unit • If you change the source, playback also stops.
Next time you select the same playback source
Basic operations stopped previously.
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also Inserting a disc
turn on the power. If the source is ready, • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
playback also starts. Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
the disc.
Turning off the power • Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and
• If you turn off the power while listening to a unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into
disc, disc play will start from where playback the loading slot.
has been stopped previously, next time you
turn on the power. Playing a disc
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start • While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
from the first track of the current folder if assigned to the audio CD (see page 24), it will
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is be shown on the display.
activated (see page 17). • While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent
Tuner operations sounds.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and • Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
stations are stored newly. • This unit can play back only files of the same
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest type which are first detected if a disc includes
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
– When SSM is over, the station stored in WMA files.
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. • This unit can play back multi-session discs;
• When storing a station manually, the however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
previously preset station is erased when a new while playing.
station is stored in the same preset number.

27
EN24-27KD-G824[UI]1.indd 27 12/23/05 9:48:36 AM

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played • The maximum number of characters for file/
back on this unit because of their disc folder names vary among the disc format used
characteristics, or for the following reasons: (includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
– Discs are dirty or scratched. <.wma>).
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens – ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
inside the unit. – ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty. – Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are – Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters
written with “Packet Write” method. – Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)
– There are improper recording conditions characters
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions * The parenthetic figure is the maximum
(stained, scratched, warped, etc.). number of characters for file/folder names in
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time case the total number of files and folders is
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than 313 or more.
that of regular CDs. • This unit can play back files recorded in VBR
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs: (variable bit rate).
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy
seal stuck to the surface. in elapsed time display, and do not show
– Discs on which labels can be directly the actual elapsed time. Especially, after
printed by an ink jet printer. performing the search function, this
Using these discs under high temperatures or difference becomes noticeable.
high humidities may cause malfunctions or • This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
damage to the unit. 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
Playing an MP3/WMA disc – MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
professional, and voice format.
files.
characters. No other characters can be
correctly displayed.
ATRAC3, etc.
meeting the conditions below:
not constant.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name
28
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 28 12/23/05 9:48:59 AM

Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory Image Link
• While playing from a USB memory, the • Image Link will not work in the following
playback order may differ from other players. cases:
• This unit may be unable to play back some – If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/
USB memories or some files due to their WMA folder.
characteristics or recording conditions. – If Intro play is activated.
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories – If the source is changed to another from
and connection ports, some USB memories “CD.”
may not be attached properly or the • If more than one <jtw> file are included in a
connection might be loose. folder, a file with the youngest file number is
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory used for Image Link.
wider than 20 mm as it will block you from
pressing the 0 button. Ejecting a disc
• If the connected USB memory does not have
the correct files, “No Files” appears and the
unit returns to the previous source.
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2,
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
meeting the conditions below: Sound adjustment
– Bit rate: General
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1)
8 kbps — 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5)
WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
(MPEG-2.5)
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in Graphic display
VBR (variable bit rate). General
• The maximum number of characters for • You can display two sizes of pictures and
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 animations.
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files the animations;
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). The image is displayed with the
dimension of the screen.
– SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
for animations;
The image is displayed like a
CD jacket (on the left side of the
display).
• Depending on a downloaded file, it may take

29
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 29 12/23/05 9:49:04 AM

Downloading (or deleting) files Title assignment
• You can download a file only while selecting • If you try to assign titles to more than 30
“CD” for the playback source; on the other station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name
hand, you can delete a file while selecting any Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before
source. assignment.
• After finishing the procedure to download a • Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can
file, playback starts from the beginning. also be shown if you play back the disc from
• If you have already downloaded an animation, the unit and vice versa.
previously stored animation. Available characters on the display
Capital letters
animation.
frame).
Small letters
frames.
– About 3 minutes for an animation of 60
frames.
Numbers and symbols
downloading. Delete unwanted files before iPod or D. player operations
downloading. • When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
• If the total frame number of an animation D. player is charged through this unit.
downloaded exceeds 60, the frames exceeding • While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
that number are ignored. operations from the iPod or D. player are
disabled. Perform all operations from this
General settings—PSM unit.
• The text information may not be displayed
• “Auto” setting for “Dimmer” may not work
correctly.
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on
those having a control dial for dimming. In
cannot be shown correctly on the display.
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any
other than “Auto.”
• If “LCD Type” is set to “Auto,” the display
pattern will change to the “Positive” or
“Negative” pattern depending on the
“Dimmer” setting.
• Changing the “Amp Gain” setting from
characters.
“High PWR” to “Low PWR” when the level
is set higher than “Volume 30,” the unit
automatically changes the volume level to
“Volume 30.”
30
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 30 12/23/05 9:49:04 AM

Notice: How to handle discs
When operating an iPod or D. player, When removing a disc from Center holder
some operations may not be performed its case, press down the center
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the holder of the case and lift the disc
following JVC web site: out, holding it by the edges.
For iPod users: • Always hold the disc by the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ edges. Do not touch its recording surface.
ks-pd100/index.html> When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
For D. player users: the disc around the center holder (with the
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ printed surface facing up).
ks-pd500/index.html> • Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.
To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
Maintenance If a disc does become dirty, wipe it
with a soft cloth in a straight line
from center to edge.
How to clean the connectors • Do not use any solvent (for example,
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
connectors. benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth
To play new discs
damage the connectors. New discs may have some rough
with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Connector
Do not use the following discs:
Moisture condensation Warped disc

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
• After starting the heater in the car. Sticker Sticker residue
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until Stick-on label
31
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 31 12/23/05 9:49:04 AM

Troubleshooting
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
MP3/WMA playback
the file names.

display).
32
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 32 12/23/05 9:49:05 AM

MP3/WMA playback
track.
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
CD changer
display.

33
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 33 12/23/05 9:49:05 AM

CD changer

the display.
PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

the control panel (see page 25).
this unit.
this unit.
34
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 34 12/23/05 9:49:06 AM

Specifications
Maximum Power Output: Type: Compact disc player
Front: 50 W per channel Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
Rear: 50 W per channel pickup (semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS): Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% Dynamic Range: 96 dB
total harmonic distortion. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% MP3 Decoding Format:
total harmonic distortion. MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance) Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Tone Control Range: WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, Format:
200 Hz) Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Mid: ±12 dB (500 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz, Playable USB memory:
2.5 kHz) Format: FAT 12/16/32
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
17.5 kHz) Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Line-Out Level/Impedance: GENERAL
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
Grounding System: Negative ground
Other Terminal: CD changer
0°C to +40°C
TUNER SECTION Dimensions (W × H × D):
Frequency Range: Installation Size (approx.):
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
[FM Tuner] Mass (approx.):
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
1.4 kg (excluding accessories)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
without notice.
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
[AM Tuner] registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sensitivity: 20 μV Microsoft Corporation in the United States
Selectivity: 35 dB and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
35
EN28-35KD-G824[UI]1.indd 35 12/23/05 9:49:06 AM

EN
Rear_KD-G824[UI]1.indd 2 12/23/05 9:46:07 AM

KD-G824
[UI] EN
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers. INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
WARNINGS regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum
power is less than 50 W, change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the
speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it Heat sink
when removing this unit.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: be careful not to damage
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit the fuse on the rear.
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Do the required electrical

connections.
Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio
dealer immediately.
Bend the appropriate tabs

to hold the sleeve firmly in
place.
A/B C D
Hard case/Control panel Sleeve Trim plate Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt
(M5 × 20 mm)

I J K L M
Rubber cushion Handles Remote controller Battery CD-ROM
(Image Converter: Ver. 3.0)
When using the optional stay When installing the unit without
TROUBLESHOOTING Stay (option)
using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car
• The fuse blows. Fire wall radio and install the unit in its place.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? *2 Not supplied
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2 for this unit.
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected? Dashboard
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? Bracket*2
Screw (option)
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? Pocket
Flat type screws
Bracket*2 (M5 × 8 mm)*2
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
Note:
When installing the unit on the mounting
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws.
• This unit does not work at all. If longer screws are used, they could damage the
* Have you reset your unit? Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. unit.
1
Instal1-2_KD-G824_[UI]f.indd 1 12/29/05 3:24:33 PM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
Antenna connector
15 A fuse
*1 Not supplied for this unit. Ignition switch

Black
Yellow *2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
Line out (see diagram ) (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Red
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
To CD changer or another external component (see diagram ) Fuse block

Blue To the automatic antenna if any
(250 mA max.)
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, Orange with white stripe
To car light control switch
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be
turned on. Brown
To cellular phone system
B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic
your car stereo system. Remote lead Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) antenna if any
• Connect the remote lead (blue with
white stripe) to the remote lead of
the other equipment so that it can be Rear speakers
controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this JVC Amplifier
unit, connect them to the amplifier. JVC Amplifier Subwoofer
Leave the speaker leads of this unit
unused.
– The line output level of this unit is
kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds
reproduced from this unit. Front speakers Front speakers *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic
body or to the chassis of the car—to the place
When connecting an external
uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,
amplifier to this unit, turn down the remove the paint before attaching the wire).
gain control on the external amplifier JVC Amplifier
Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
to obtain the best performance from
this unit. *4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
C Connecting the external components

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*5 or D. player can be Apple iPod (separately
connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 purchased)
(for D. player).
CAUTION:
Before connecting the external
components, make sure that the unit is
turned off.
or
JVC D. player (separately
purchased) *5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
JVC CD changer
*6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD
changer
CD changer jack

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
External component
CD changer jack External component
*7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug
Instal1-2_KD-G824_[UI]f.indd 2 12/29/05 3:24:39 PM

РУCCKИЙ ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ
KD-G827
В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потребителей” срок службы

(годности) данного товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни,
здоровья потребителя, причинять вред его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7)
лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем, в течение которого потребитель данного
товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения инструкции по эксплуатации
данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных материалов
и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.
Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляемые вместе с ним, могут
храниться в течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.
Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных косметических материалов,
упомянутых в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в
частности, гарантийного свидетельства JVC, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о
правах потребителя или других законов, связанных с ним.

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
GET0363-001A
[EE]
Cover_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 9:54:01 AM

ENGLISH


mode.
To use these controls for original functions

• If this does not work, reset your unit. again, wait for 15 seconds without pressing any
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects. of these buttons until the control is cleared.
Caution:
EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 9:52:21 AM

CONTENTS
ENGLISH
“More about this unit” (see pages 35 – 39). Remote controller — RM-RK50 ................. 5
Getting started ................................. 6
FM RDS operations ............................ 9
Press repeatedly. Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ....... 10
Press either
one.
desired response begins. General settings — PSM ................... 19
Press and hold both iPod®/D. player operations ................ 28
buttons at the same time. Other external component operations ... 30
DAB tuner operations........................ 31
The following marks are used to indicate...
Maintenance .................................... 39
Specifications ................................... 43
Warning: For safety...

If you need to operate the unit while driving, • Do not raise the volume level too much, as
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be this will block outside sounds, making driving
involved in a traffic accident. dangerous.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared Temperature inside the car...
with other sources. Lower the volume If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
before playing a disc to avoid damaging or cold weather, wait until the temperature in
the speakers by the sudden increase of the the car becomes normal before operating the
output level. unit.
EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 3 12/23/05 9:52:24 AM

Control panel
ENGLISH
1 BAND button 7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)

2 • Control dial button
• (standby/on attenuator) button 8 0 (eject) button
3 DISP (display) button 9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal
4 Remote sensor p SRC (source) button
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to q (control panel release) button
strong light (direct sunlight or artificial w SEL (select) button
lighting). e MODE button
5 Display window r Number buttons
6 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons t 4/¢ buttons

Lever CAUTION:
EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 4 12/23/05 9:52:25 AM

ENGLISH
(CR2025)

• Do not install any battery other than • Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with 5 U.
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may • Changes the preset stations (or services)
explode. with D ∞.
• Store the battery in a place where children • Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident. USB.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating, • While playing an MP3 disc on an
cracking, or starting a fire: MP3-compatible CD changer:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, – Changes the disc if pressed briefly.
heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. – Changes the folder if pressed and held.
– Do not leave the battery with other • While listening to an Apple iPod® or a
metallic materials. JVC D. player:
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or – Pauses/stops or resumes playback with
similar tools. D ∞.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate – Enters the main menu with 5 U. (Now
when throwing away or saving it. 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
Caution: • Adjusts the volume level.
4 SOUND button
equalizer).


5
EN02-05KD-G827[EE]f.indd 5 12/23/05 9:52:25 AM

5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. ⁄ Adjust the volume.
ENGLISH
• Searches for stations (or services) if

pressed briefly.
• Searches for ensembles if pressed and
held.
pressed and held. @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly. pages 17 – 19.)
(in menu selecting mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and To restore the sound, press it
held. again.

Getting started
Basic operations
Basic settings
19 – 22.
Ÿ 1
2-1 Canceling the display

demonstrations
to “Off.”
* You cannot select these sources if they
are not ready or not connected.
! 1 Press number button 4 (
“Clock Hr” (hour) appears. Then,
).

hour.
• For FM/AM tuner
• For DAB tuner
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 6 12/23/05 9:51:43 AM

ENGLISH
display mode.


To check the current clock time when the Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
power is turned off a longer time to show it on the display.
Radio operations
~
Ÿ

stops.
*2 lights up on the display.

“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed. again.
Note:
FM1 and FM2: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz
FM3: 65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz

7
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 7 12/23/05 9:51:47 AM

To tune in to a station manually 2
In step ! on page 7...
ENGLISH
1
3 Select “SSM.”
4
receive
1
2 searched and stored automatically in the FM
band.
Manual presetting
3 Exit from the setting. number 4 of the FM1 band.

lights up on the display. 1
Reception improves, but stereo effect will
be lost.

2

3
Memory) Using the Preset Station List
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you • When appears on the display, you can
want to store into. move back to the previous display by pressing
number button 3.
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 8 12/23/05 9:51:48 AM

1 Follow steps 1 and 2 of “Using the
number buttons” on page 8.
ENGLISH
• By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Station List Using the number buttons
will appear (go to step 4).
1
2

3 Display the Preset Station List. want to listen to.

listen to.
store into. 2 Change to the selected station.

FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations
to send an additional signal along with their
regular programme signals.
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see page 10)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY
Standby Receptions (see page 11)
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 12)
• Programme Search (see page 21)

9
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 9 12/23/05 9:51:50 AM

Searching for your favorite ⁄ Start searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme programme.
ENGLISH
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your

favorite programme by searching for a PTY
code.
If there is a station broadcasting a
number button 3.
programme of the same PTY code as you
~ have selected, that station is tuned in.
Ÿ Select “Search.”
Storing your favorite
programme types
You can store six favorite programme types.
number button 3.
1
The PTY Preset List including six preset
PTY codes appears on the display.
! Select a PTY code (see page 12). 2 Select “Memory.”
• You can select one from 35 PTY codes

including the first 6 preset codes
which can be preset as you like (see the 3 Select a preset number (“Preset1”–
following). “Preset6”) you want to store into.
• To display the other PTY Preset Lists,
press number button 5 ( ) or 6
( ) repeatedly.
4 Select one of the PTY codes.
10
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 10 12/23/05 9:51:51 AM

5 Store the selected PTY code. To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
ENGLISH
goes off.
PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to
switch temporarily to your favorite programme
type from any source other than AM.
EX.: When “Classics” is selected in step 4 on page 10 • This function also takes effect for the DAB
tuner.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to store other PTY To activate the PTY Standby Reception and
codes into other preset numbers. select the PTY codes
2 Activating the PTY Standby Reception.

Display the currently selected PTY code.
Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)
from any source other than AM.
• If a station starts broadcasting a traffic
3 Selecting a PTY code.
announcement, “Traffic News” appears on the
display, and this unit temporarily tunes in to
the station. The volume changes to the preset
TA volume level if the current level is lower
than the preset level (see page 21). 4 Exit from the setting.
To activate the TA Standby Reception

either lights up or flashes on either lights up or flashes on the display.
the display. • If lights up, PTY Standby Reception is
activated.
• If lights up, TA Standby Reception is • If flashes, PTY Standby Reception is not
activated. yet activated.
• If flashes, TA Standby Reception is not To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in
yet activated. (This occurs when you are to another station (or service) providing the
listening to an FM station without the RDS related signals. will stop flashing and
signals required for TA Standby Reception.) remain lit.
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in
to another station (or service) providing the To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception
related signals. will stop flashing and Select “PTY Off” in step 2 above.
remain lit. goes off.
11
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 11 12/23/05 9:51:53 AM

Tracing the same programme— Disc/USB memory
Network-Tracking Reception
ENGLISH
operations
When driving in an area where FM reception
is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically Playing a disc in the unit
tunes in to another FM RDS station of the
same network, possibly broadcasting the same
programme with stronger signals (see the
illustration below).
When shipped from the factory, Network-

Tracking Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-Regn’l” on page 21.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05) To stop playback and eject the disc

~
PTY codes
News, Affairs, Info, Sport, Educate, Drama,
Culture, Science, Varied, Pop M (music),
Rock M (music), Easy M (music), Light M * If you have changed the external input
(music), Classics, Other M (music), Weather, setting to “Ext In” (see page 22), you
Finance, Children, Social, Religion, Phone In, cannot select the CD changer.
Travel, Leisure, Jazz, Country, Nation M
(music), Oldies, Folk M (music), Document
Ÿ Select a disc.
12
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 12 12/23/05 9:51:55 AM

ENGLISH
USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 21).
Cautions:
13
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 13 12/23/05 9:51:56 AM

ENGLISH

For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
14
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 14 12/23/05 9:51:58 AM

ENGLISH
number button 3.
1
MP3-compatible CD changer
2 Select “LIST.”

1

skip 10 tracks.
selected and vice versa.
*1 Selectable only when the source is
“CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the media is MP3, 3
WMA, or USB.
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
15
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 15 12/23/05 9:52:00 AM

ENGLISH

procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Mode Plays beginning 15 seconds of... *1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/
Off: Cancels.
16
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 16 12/23/05 9:52:02 AM

Sound adjustments 80 Hz are cut off.
ENGLISH
120 Hz are cut off.
160 Hz are cut off.
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference. 3 Turn the control dial to adjust the
• When appears on the display, you can subwoofer output level. [0 to 8]
number button 3. C VolAdjust
Turn the control dial to adjust the input
1 [–5 to +5]
Adjust to match the input level of the
FM sound level.
2 • Before making an adjustment, select a
D Loudness
• For “EQ” setting, see the following. well-balanced sound at low volume
levels. [Off or On]
3 Adjust the selected setting item.
A Fad/Bal (Fader/Balance) 4 Exit from the setting.
display.
by pressing:
5 / ∞: between the front and rear Selecting preset sound modes
4/¢ : (i-EQ: intelligent equalizer)
between the left and right You can select a preset sound mode suitable to
speakers. [L06 to R06] the music genre.
B Subwoofer Available sound modes

1 Press number button 1 ( ) to FLAT (No sound mode is applied), H.ROCK
move to the “Subwoofer” adjustment (Hard rock), R & B (Rhythm & blues),
display. POP, JAZZ, DANCE, COUNTRY, REGGAE,
2 Use 4/¢ to select a CLASSIC, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3
cutoff frequency to the subwoofer.
number button 3.

17
EN06-17KD-G827[EE]f.indd 17 12/23/05 9:52:03 AM

1 3 Press number button 2 ( ), then
width.
ENGLISH
2 Select a sound mode.

Sound Range/selectable items
Level –06 to –06 to –06 to
+06 +06 +06
To display the rest FREQ 60 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz
(Frequency) 80 Hz 1 kHz 12.5kHz
200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
Q1.5 Q1.0
3 Exit from the setting. Q2.0 Q1.25

frequency ranges.
Storing your own sound modes
own adjustments in memory.
number button 3.

frequency.
18
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 18 12/23/05 9:53:02 AM

Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz



display.

To display the rest

19
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 19 12/23/05 9:53:05 AM

ENGLISH

Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 0 – 23 (1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM), [7]
Hour adjustment [Initial: 0 (0:00)]
Clock Min 00 – 59, [7]
Minute adjustment [Initial: 00 (0:00)]
CLOCK

Clock Adj Auto: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically
Clock adjustment adjusted using the CT (clock time) data in
the RDS signal.
Off: Cancels.
Scroll Once: [Initial]; For disc information: scrolls the
Scroll disc information only once.
For DAB text: scrolls the detailed DAB text.
Auto: For disc information: repeats the scroll (in
5-second intervals).
Off: For disc information: cancels.
For DAB text: shows only headline if any.
DISPLAY
Off: Cancels.
From – To*1: [Initial: 18 – 7]
20
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 20 12/23/05 9:53:06 AM

ENGLISH
legible.
DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
AF-Regn’l When the received signals from the current FM RDS station
Alternative become weak....
frequency/ AF: [Initial]; Switches to another station (or
regionalization service) (the programme may differ from the
reception one currently received), [12, 34].
• The AF indicator lights up.
AF REG: Switches to another station broadcasting the
same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
Off: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is
TUNER
set to “On”).
TA Volume 0 — 30 or 0 — 50*3, [11]
Traffic announcement [Initial 15]
volume
P-Search On: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to
Programme search another frequency broadcasting the same
programme as the original preset RDS
station is if the preset station signals are not
sufficient.
Off: [Initial]; Cancels
*3 Depends on the amplifier gain control.

21
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 21 12/23/05 9:53:07 AM

ENGLISH

TUNER

remain.
DAB AF*4 On: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB
Alternative frequency services and FM RDS stations, [12, 34].
reception Off: Cancels.
the above, [30].
AUDIO

COLOR

*4 Displayed only when the DAB tuner is connected.
22
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 22 12/23/05 9:53:09 AM

Graphic displays 4 Select a picture size.
ENGLISH
prepare a CD-R including still images (pictures) or
• With Image Converter (Ver 3.0) included in
the supplied CD-ROM, you can create and The display goes to the PICT menu.
download your own images and animations.
(Samples are included in the CD-ROM.) • To download the file(s), see page 24.
These images/animation will be shown during • To delete the file(s), see pages 24 and 25.
playing a source. • To activate the file(s), see page 26.
• You can store “LARGE” or “SMALL” pictures
and movies.
Picture: 30 still images each IMPORTANT:
Movie: 60 frames each • Refer also to Image Converter PDF files
included in the “Manual” folder on the
supplied CD-ROM.
Basic procedure • Still images (pictures) and animations
• When appears on the display, you can (movie) should have the following
move back to the previous display by pressing extension code in their file names:
number button 3. – jtl: for large size still images
• When / appears on the display, – jtm: for small size still images
you can move to the other lists by pressing – jta: for large size animations
number button 5 or 6 repeatedly. – jtb: for small size animations
– jtw: for Image Link (see pages 14 and 20)
1 Insert a CD-R or the supplied observe the following:
CD-ROM. – Do not download a file while driving.
– Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
2 Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 19. while downloading or deleting a file.*
• In step 2, select “MOVIE.” – Do not detach the control panel while
• In step 3, select “Pict.” downloading or deleting a file.*
while downloading a file.*
3 Select an item. * If you do so, the file download or deletion
23
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 23 12/23/05 9:53:10 AM

Downloading pictures or an animation 6 Confirm the selection.
ENGLISH


2
8 • To download more pictures from


List appears on the display. 9 Exit from the setting.
3 Select a folder.
Deleting the files

4 Enter the File List. • In step 3, select “Delete.”
5 Select a file.

step 4 on page 23
24
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 24 12/23/05 9:53:11 AM

3 Delete the animation. • To delete all the stored pictures
ENGLISH
23

Deleting the stored pictures
Deleting all the stored files
2

1 Use 5 / ∞ to select a file. Then, press EX.: When “LARGE” is selected in
number button 1 ( ) to confirm step 4 on page 23
the selection.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete more 4 Exit from the setting.
pictures.
25
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 25 12/23/05 9:53:12 AM

ENGLISH

number button 3.

is selected
Movie Your edited animation stored 3 Adjust the dimmer time.

in “Movie” is activated. \ Go 1 Turn the control dial to set the dimmer
to step 3. time.
Picture One of your edited still images 2 Press ¢ to select “To.” Then, turn
stored in “Picture” is activated. the control dial to set the dimmer end
\ Go to step 3. time.
Slideshow All stored still images are
activated and shown in 4 Exit from the setting.
sequence (UserSlide).
beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*
The unit returns to the playback display. • When appears on the display, you can
• To display the activated files, see page 7. number button 3.

26
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 26 12/23/05 9:53:13 AM

ENGLISH


In*2) O USB*3 O FM O AM O DAB*3
O Ipod*3/D.PLAYER*3 O (back to the
beginning)

page 22.
component is connected. 3 Select a primary color.
4 Select a color.

selected primary color.

*5 The user-edited colors—“Day Color” and 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other
“NightColor” will be applied (see right primary colors.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the color
27
EN18-27KD-G827[EE]f.indd 27 12/23/05 9:53:15 AM

Title assignment character.
• For available characters, see page 38.
ENGLISH
You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit 3 Use 4/¢ to move to the next
and the CD changer) and external components (or previous) character position.
(Ext In).
entering the title.
Maximum number of
Sources
characters
4 Store the title.
CDs/CD-CH* Up to 32 characters (up to
30 discs)
External Up to 8 characters
components
To erase the entire title
WMA/USB.
In step 3 on the left...
number button 3.

• For external components: Select “Ext In” iPod®/D. player operations
(see page 22).
of this unit.
3 Assign a title. controlling a D. player.
repeatedly to select a character set. • For connection, see Installation/Connection
28
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 28 12/29/05 9:38:34 AM

Caution: To fast-forward or reverse the track
ENGLISH

Preparations:
~ Selecting a track from the menu

Ÿ
Playback starts automatically from where 2 Select the desired menu.


For iPod:
Playlists O Artists O Albums O Songs
O Genres O Composers O (back to the
beginning)
For D. player:
• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or Playlist O Artist O Album O Genre O
D. player is deactivated. Track O (back to the beginning)
To pause (only for iPod) or stop (only for * The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
D. player) playback – If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
29
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 29 12/23/05 9:52:39 AM

ENGLISH

menu, press 5.

automatically.
Songs” of the iPod [ ]or
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Off: Cancels.
“MENU.”

operations
[ ].
[ ].
pages 28 – 30.
Off: Cancels.

30
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 30 12/23/05 9:52:40 AM

Ÿ Turn on the connected component Ÿ
ENGLISH
! Start searching for an ensemble.
When an ensemble is received, searching

⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See stops.
pages 17 – 19.) To stop searching, press the same button
again.
⁄ Select a service (either primary or

secondary) you want to listen to.
DAB tuner operations
What is DAB system?
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver
digital quality sound without any annoying
interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,
it can carry text, pictures, and data. When To tune in to an ensemble manually
transmitting, DAB combines several In step ! above...
programmes (called “services”) to form one 1
“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called
“primary service”—can also be divided into its
components (called “secondary service”). A
typical ensemble has six or more programmes
(services) broadcast at the same time. 2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.
By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do
the following:
—Alternative Frequency Reception (see “DAB
AF” on page 22).
It is recommended to use DAB tuner
When surrounding sounds are noisy
KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have
another DAB tuner, consult your JVC Some service provides Dynamic Range Control
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer. (DRC) signals together with their regular
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low
your DAB tuner. level sounds to improve for your listening.
1
~

31
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 31 12/23/05 9:52:42 AM

2 Select one of the DRC signals levels (1, 2, 2 Select an ensemble (primary service).
or 3).
ENGLISH
3
The reinforcement increases from 1 to 3.

Using the Preset Service List
appears on the display. • By holding 5 / ∞, the Preset Service List
• will be highlighted only when will appear (go to step 4).
receiving DRC signals from the tuned
service. 2
To search for your favorite service
You can search for either Dynamic or Static 3 Display the Preset Service List.
PTY codes.
• Operations are exactly the same as explained
on page 10 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the
DAB tuner and the FM tuner.
• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner
only.
Storing DAB services in memory 4 Select a preset number you want to

store into.
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for
each band.
number button 3.
• You can move to the lists of the other
EX.: Storing an ensemble (primary service) into DAB bands by pressing number button
the preset number 4 of the DAB 1 band. 5( ) or 6 ( ) repeatedly, but
you cannot store the selected service into
Using the number buttons these bands.
32
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 32 12/23/05 9:52:43 AM

5 Store the service.
Using the standby reception
ENGLISH
You can use three types of Standby Reception.
• Road Traffic News Standby Reception—TA
Standby Reception (see the following).
• Announcement Standby Reception (see the
following)
• PTY Standby Reception (see page 34).
Tuning in to a preset DAB service

Road Traffic News Standby Reception
Using the number buttons (TA Standby Reception)
Road Traffic News Standby Reception allows
1 the unit to switch temporarily to the Road
Traffic News (or Traffic Announcement) from
any source other than AM. The volume changes
to the preset TA volume level if the current level
2 Select the preset DAB service is lower than the preset level (see page 21).
(primary) number (1 – 6) you want to • Operations are exactly the same as explained
listen to. on page 11 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot use Road Traffic News Standby
Reception (TA Standby Reception) separately
for the DAB tuner and FM tuner.
If the selected primary service has some Announcement Standby Reception

secondary services, pressing the same
Announcement Standby Reception allows the
button again will tune in to the secondary
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite
services.
service (announcement type).
Using the Preset Service List To activate the Announcement Standby

1 Display the Preset Service List, then Reception and select the announcement type
select the preset DAB service you want
to listen to.
1
2 Change to the selected DAB service.

2 Activating the Announcement
Standby Reception.
Display the currently selected
announcement type.

33
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 33 12/23/05 9:52:44 AM

3 Selecting an announcement type.
Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
ENGLISH
You can keep listening to the same programme

by activating the Alternative Frequency
Reception.
4 Exit from the setting. • While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service
cannot be received, this unit automatically
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS
either lights up or flashes on the playback station, broadcasting the same programme.
display. • While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service
• If lights up, Announcement Standby is broadcasting the same programme as the
Reception is activated. FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit
• If flashes, Announcement Standby automatically tunes in to the DAB service.
Reception is not yet activated. When shipped from the factory, Alternative
To activate, tune in to another service Frequency Reception is activated.
providing the related signals. will stop To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
flashing and remain lit. Reception, see page 22.
To deactivate the Announcement Standby To show the Dynamic Label Segment (DLS)
Reception information
Select “Announce Off” in step 2 on page 33. While listening to an ensemble that supports
goes off. DLS....
Announcement types
Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Lights up when receiving a service providing Dynamic Label
Special, Rad Inf (Radio Information), Sports, Segment (DLS)—DAB radio text.
Finance

on page 11 for FM RDS stations. • The DLS display will be temporarily
• PTY Standby Reception for DAB tuner works canceled when you operate the unit.
only using a dynamic PTY code.
• You can activate and deactivate PTY Standby To show whole text at once, press and hold
Reception when the source is either “FM” or DISP while DLS is displayed. Multi-line text
“DAB.” display appears.
• When the text contains more than 64
characters, another window appears to
show the rest of the text.
To restore the previous display, press and
hold DISP again.
34
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 34 12/23/05 9:52:46 AM

• When Alternative Frequency Reception
More about this unit is activated (with AF selected), Network-
Tracking Reception is also activated
ENGLISH
automatically. On the other hand, Network-
Basic operations
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
Turning on the power without deactivating Alternative Frequency
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also Reception. (See pages 21 and 22.)
turn on the power. If the source is ready, • TA Standby Reception and PTY Standby
playback also starts. Reception will be temporarily canceled while
Turning off the power listening to an AM station.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
• If you turn off the power while listening to a
«http://www.rds.org.uk».
turn on the power. Disc operations
– For MP3/WMA disc: Disc play will start Caution for DualDisc playback
from the first track of the current folder if • The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does
a <jtw> file is included and Image Link is not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital
activated (see page 20). Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-
Tuner operations not be recommended.
• During SSM search... General
– All previously stored stations are erased and • This unit has been designed to reproduce
stations are stored newly. CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency). MP3 and WMA formats.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in • If you change the source, playback also stops.
No. 1 will be automatically tuned in. Next time you select the same playback source
• When storing a station manually, the again, playback starts from where it has been
previously preset station is erased when a new stopped previously.
Inserting a disc
FM RDS operations • When a disc is inserted upside down, “Please
• Network-Tracking Reception requires Eject” appears on the display. Press 0 to eject
two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme the disc.
Identification) and AF (Alternative • Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and
Frequency) to work correctly. Without unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into
receiving these data correctly, Network- the loading slot.
Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.
• Receiving the Traffic Announcement by TA Playing a disc
Standby Reception, the volume level (TA
• While playing an audio CD: If a title has been
VOL) automatically changes to the preset
assigned to the audio CD (see page 28), it will
level if the current level is lower than the
be shown on the display.
preset level.
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3
sounds.
35
EN28-35KD-G827[EE]f.indd 35 12/23/05 9:52:47 AM

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW • This unit can play back MP3/WMA files
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
ENGLISH
• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes
both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/
WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped
• The maximum number of characters for file/
while playing.
folder names vary among the disc format used
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
back on this unit because of their disc
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens
– Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters
inside the unit.
– Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are
characters
written with “Packet Write” method.
* The parenthetic figure is the maximum
– There are improper recording conditions
number of characters for file/folder names in
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions
case the total number of files and folders is
313 or more.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time
that of regular CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective
seal stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly
printed by an ink jet printer.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of
Using these discs under high temperatures or
200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
high humidities may cause malfunctions or
damage to the unit.
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and
MP3 PRO format.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc – MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files format.
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> – MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower). – WMA files encoded with lossless,
• This unit can show the names of albums, professional, and voice format.
artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, – WMA files which are not based upon
2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA Windows Media® Audio.
files. – WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
• This unit can display only one-byte – Files which have the data such as WAVE,
characters. No other characters can be ATRAC3, etc.
correctly displayed. • The search function works but search speed is
not constant.
36
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 36 12/23/05 9:53:28 AM

Playing MP3/WMA track from a USB memory • If more than one <jtw> file are included in a
folder, a file with the youngest file number is
• While playing from a USB memory, the
used for Image Link.
ENGLISH
playback order may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some
USB memories or some files due to their Ejecting a disc
characteristics or recording conditions. • If the ejected disc is not removed within
• Depending on the shape of the USB memories 15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted
and connection ports, some USB memories again into the loading slot to protect it from
may not be attached properly or the dust. (Disc will not be played this time.)
connection might be loose.
• It is not recommended to use a USB memory Sound adjustment
pressing the 0 button. General
• If the connected USB memory does not have • If you are using a two-speaker system, set the
the correct files, “No Files” appears and the fader level to the center (“00”).
unit returns to the previous source. • Subwoofer out setting takes effect only when a
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, subwoofer is connected.
2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files. • You cannot change the input level—
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files “VolAdjust” of the FM stations. If you try to
meeting the conditions below: adjust it for FM, “Fix” will appear.
– Bit rate:
MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps (MPEG-1) Graphic display
WMA: 5 kbps — 320 kbps General
– Sampling frequency: • You can display two sizes of pictures and
MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1) animations.
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) – LARGE: <jtl> for still pictures and <jta> for
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz the animations;
(MPEG-2.5) The image is displayed with the
WMA: 8 kHz — 48 kHz dimension of the screen.
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in – SMALL: <jtm> for still pictures and <jtb>
VBR (variable bit rate). for animations;
• The maximum number of characters for The image is displayed like a
folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 CD jacket (on the left side of the
characters for MP3/WMA tag information. display).
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files • Depending on a downloaded file, it may take
and 250 folders (999 files per folder). longer time to show it on the display.
Image Link Downloading (or deleting) files

• Image Link will not work in the following • You can download a file only while selecting
cases: “CD” for the playback source; on the other
– If no <jtw> file is included in an MP3/ hand, you can delete a file while selecting any
WMA folder. source.
– If Intro play is activated. • After finishing the procedure to download a
– If the source is changed to another from file, playback starts from the beginning.
“CD.”

37
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 37 12/23/05 9:53:31 AM

• If you have already downloaded an animation, • Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can
downloading a new animation deletes the also be shown if you play back the disc from
previously stored animation. the unit and vice versa.
ENGLISH

animation. Available characters on the display
• This unit can display Romans alphabets
frame).
(A – Z, a – z), Cyrillic alphabets, numbers,
and symbols (see below).
frames.
These characters are also used to show the
various information on the display.
frames.
Upper case (Cyrillic alphabets)
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start Lower case (Cyrillic alphabets)
downloading.
Numbers and symbols
General settings—PSM
those having a control dial for dimming. In iPod or D. player operations
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or
D. player is charged through this unit.
• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all
operations from the iPod or D. player are
unit.
correctly.
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment D. player and the unit.
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 • If the text information includes more than
station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before also page 20). This unit can display up to 40
assignment. characters.
38
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 38 12/23/05 9:53:32 AM

Notice: Moisture condensation
When operating an iPod or D. player, Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
ENGLISH
some operations may not be performed CD player in the following cases:
correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the • After starting the heater in the car.
following JVC web site: • If it becomes very humid inside the car.
For iPod users: Should this occur, the CD player may
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/ malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and
ks-pd100/index.html> leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
For D. player users: the moisture evaporates.
How to handle discs
DAB tuner operations When removing a disc from Center holder
• PTY Standby Reception works for the DAB
tuner only using a Dynamic PTY, but not a
Static PTY.
• TA Standby Reception for FM RDS station
and Road Traffic News Standby Reception for
DAB cannot be set separately. The T/P button
always work for the both Standby Reception
modes when the DAB tuner is connected.
• Only primary DAB services can be presetted
use.
even when you store a secondary service.
• A previously preset DAB service is erased
when a new DAB service is stored in the same To keep discs clean
preset number. A dirty disc may not play correctly.
Maintenance • Do not use any solvent (for example,
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
How to clean the connectors benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the
connectors. To play new discs
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe New discs may have some rough
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth spots around the inner and outer
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to edges. If such a disc is used, this
damage the connectors. unit may reject the disc.
Connector
Sticker Sticker residue Stick-on label
Warped disc
39
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 39 12/23/05 9:53:33 AM

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
• Static noise while listening to the Connect the aerial firmly.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
the file names.
MP3/WMA playback

display).
40
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 40 12/23/05 9:53:34 AM

MP3/WMA playback
ENGLISH
track.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can display Roman alphabets, Cyrillic
(e.g. album name). alphabets, numbers and symbols (see page 38).
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
• Correct characters are not displayed This unit can display Roman alphabets, Cyrillic
(e.g. album name). alphabets, numbers and symbols (see page 38).
display.
CD changer
the display.

41
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 41 12/23/05 9:53:35 AM

ENGLISH

PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

this unit.
this unit.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the Move to an area with stronger signals.
display.
• “Reset 08” appears on the display. Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly
and reset the unit (see page 2).
DAB
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the Check the cords and connections.
display.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly
42
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 42 12/23/05 9:53:35 AM

Specifications
ENGLISH
Low: ±12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz) Format:
High: ±12 dB (10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, Playable USB memory:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA
Line-Out Level/Impedance: Max. Current: Less than 500 mA
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ GENERAL
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance: Power Requirement:
2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale) Operating Voltage:
Other Terminal: CD changer DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
TUNER SECTION Allowable Operating Temperature:
Frequency Range: 0°C to +40°C
FM1/FM2 : 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Dimensions (W × H × D):
FM3 : 65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz Installation Size (approx.):
AM : (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
without notice.
[MW Tuner] registered trademarks or trademarks of
[LW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 50 μV
43
EN36-43KD-G827[EE]f.indd 43 12/23/05 9:53:36 AM

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу
EN, RU
Rear_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 2 12/23/05 9:53:52 AM

KD-G827
Руководство по установке/подключению
[EE] EN, RU
ENGLISH РУССКИЙ
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом на
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор напряжения, который
ENTERTAINMENT dealers. может быть приобретен у дилера автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
WARNINGS ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный
electrical connections before installing the unit. разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • После установки обязательно заземлите данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.
Notes: Примечания:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR • Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем указанного класса. Если предохранитель
ENTERTAINMENT dealer. сгорает слишком часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear • Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change передней панели устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если максимальная
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS). мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “Amp Gain”, чтобы предотвратить их
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape. повреждение (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22).
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit. • Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей
лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во время
удаления устройства.
Heat sink
Радиатор
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit громкоговорителей:
will be seriously damaged. • НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in устройство будет повреждено.
your car. • ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю питания громкоговорителя
проверьте схему соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.
Parts list for installation and connection Список деталей для установки и подключения
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством. При отсутствии какого-либо
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.
A/B C D
Жесткий футляр/панель Муфта Декоративную панель
управления
E F G H
Power cord Washer (ø5) Lock nut (M5) Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
Кабель питания Шайба (њ5) Фиксирующая гайка (M5) Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)
I J K L M
Резиновый чехол Рычаги диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния Бaтapeйкa (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
CD-ROM
(Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Instal1-2_KD-G827[EE]f.indd 1 12/23/05 10:27:04 AM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы,
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в
kits. компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician. • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к
квалифицированному специалисту.

Выполните необходимые подключения
контактов, как показано на оборотной
стороне этой инструкции.

fuse on the rear.
*1 Устанавливайте
устройство таким
образом, чтобы не
повредить
Отогните соответствующие
предохранитель,
фиксаторы, предназначенные для
расположенный сзади.
прочной установки корпуса.
Removing the unit Удаление устройства

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните
их, как показано на рисунке, чтобы
вынуть устройство.
When using the optional stay / При использовании When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства без
дополнительной стойки использования муфты
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall Stay (option) В автомобилях “Toyota”, например, сначала удалите автомобильную магнитолу, затем установите на ее место
Стена Стойка (дополнительно) это устройство.
*2 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Не входит в комплект.
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)* 2
Приборная панель
Bracket*2
Screw (option) Кронштейн *2
Винт (дополнительно)
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Pocket
Карман Bracket*2
Кронштейн *2
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. are used, they could damage the unit.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°. Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.
TROUBLESHOOTING BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

• The fuse blows. • Сработал предохранитель.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
• Power cannot be turned on. • Питание не включается.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * Подключен ли желтый провод?
• No sound from the speakers. • Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода громкоговорителей?
• Sound is distorted. • Звук искажен.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?
• Noise interfere with sounds. • Шум мешает звучанию.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? * Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью более
• This unit becomes hot. короткого и тонкого шнуров?
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • Устройство нагревается.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
• This unit does not work at all. * Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?
* Have you reset your unit? • Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
2

ENGLISH РУССКИЙ
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
A If your car is equipped with the ISO For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi
connector / Если автомобиль оснащен или Opel (Vauxhall)
разъемом ISO You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated. • Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке. Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1
From the car body

A B
От корпуса автомобиля
C D
E F
G H
ISO connector
Разъем ISO
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему
I J
ISO connector of the supplied power cord соединений 2.
K L
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в
комплект поставки Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2
M N
O P
Y: Yellow R: Red
View from the lead side Желтый Красный
Вид со стороны выводов
B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное
damage to this unit. подключение может привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color. Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
1 Cut the ISO connector. 1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below. 2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном ниже порядке.
3 Connect the aerial cord. 3 Подключите кабель антенны.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit. 4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.

К низкочастотный динамик
Aerial connector (см. схему )
Разъем антенны
15 A fuse
Предохранитель 15 A

Rear ground terminal *1 Не входит в комплект Переключатель зажигания
Задний разъем
заземления
Black
Черный
Line out (see diagram ) К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
К выходу (см. схему )
To external components (see diagram ) Yellow *2

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
К внешним устройствам (см. схему ) Желтый*2
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя
(минуя блок зажигания) (постоянный 12 В)
Red Fuse block

Красный Блок предохранителя
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.
*2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите
этот провод, иначе питание не включится. Blue with white stripe
Синий с белой полосой
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
Orange with white stripe

Оранжевый с белой полосой
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля
Brown
Коричневый
К системе сотового телефона
Белый с черной Белый Серый с черной Серый Зеленый с черной Зеленый Пурпурный с черной Пурпурный
полосой полосой полосой полосой
Левый громкоговоритель Правый громкоговоритель Левый громкоговоритель Правый
(передний) (передний) (задний) громкоговоритель
(задний)

C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Подключение внешних усилителей и/или Низкочастотный динамик
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system. Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it • Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего
can be controlled through this unit. устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker • Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства, подключите их к усилителю.
leads of this unit unused. Оставьте провода громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit. – Уровень выходного сигнала линии данного устройства поддерживается высоким, чтобы
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the обеспечить высококачественный звук, воспроизводимый данным устройством.
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit. При подключении внешнего усилителя к данному устройству убавьте регулировку
усиления на внешнем усилителе, чтобы обеспечить оптимальные характеристики работы
данного устройства.
Remote lead Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Провод внешнего устройства Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой) To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
Rear speakers JVC Amplifier

Задние *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the
громкоговорители
JVC-усилитель
metallic body or to the chassis of the
Subwoofer
car—to the place not coated with paint (if
Низкочастотный
JVC Amplifier coated with paint, remove the paint before
динамик
JVC-усилитель attaching the wire). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.
*3 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий
провод к металлическому кузову
Rear speakers
или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не
Задние громкоговорители
Front speakers покрытом краской (если оно покрыто
Front speakers (see diagram ) краской, удалите краску перед тем, как
Передние Передние
громкоговорители громкоговорители (см. схему ) прикреплять провод). Невыполнение
этого требования может привести к
*5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s повреждению данного устройства.
JVC Amplifier ISO connector and connect them to the
JVC-усилитель amplifier.
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*5 Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков
*4 Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект
для разъема ISO автомобиля и
поставки)
подсоедините их к усилителю.
D Connecting the external components / Подключение внешних устройств

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, проигрыватель Apple iPod® или JVC D.
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “Changer” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22.)
You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*6 или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект
поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)
Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (продается отдельно)
or CAUTION / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:
JVC CD changer или JVC D. player (separately purchased)
• Before connecting the external
JVC DAB tuner Проигрыватель Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)
нескольких компакт- components, make sure that the unit
Тюнер DAB JVC
дисков JVC is turned off.
• Перед подключением устройства
CD changer jack
автоматической смены
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
компакт-дисков, что приемник
отключен.
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)

*6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
Apple iPod (separately purchased) countries.
Apple iPod (продается отдельно) *6 iPod является торговоймаркой Apple
Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в
США и других странах.
or *7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD

JVC CD changer JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC DAB tuner or или changer or DAB tuner
Проигрыватель Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)
Тюнер DAB JVC или нескольких компакт- *7 Подключение кабеля, входящего
дисков JVC в комплект поставки устройства
CD changer jack компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB
Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
Other external component / Другое внешнее устройство

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “Ext In” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22.)
External component
Внешнее устройство

Разъем устройства
Внешнее устройство
компакт-дисков *8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*8 Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект
поставки)
Мини-разъем стерео-3,5

*9 Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS-U58
(не входит в комплект поставки)

ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-G825
KD-G825
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0360-001A
[U/UH]
Cover_KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:15:43 AM

ENGLISH


mode.
Caution:
2
EN02-05KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:18:26 AM

CONTENTS
ENGLISH
Getting started ................................. 6
one.
Press and hold both
operations .................................... 26
Maintenance .................................... 31
Warning:
dangerous.
unit.

Control panel
ENGLISH


Lever CAUTION:

ENGLISH
(CR2025)

equalizer).


5

5 SOURCE button
ENGLISH

held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
1

demonstrations
to “Off.”

hour.
display mode.

ENGLISH
~
Ÿ

stops.
again.
*2
In step ! above...

1

7

2 Manual presetting
ENGLISH


be lost.
3

number button 3.
want to store into.
2
2
3 Select “SSM.”

band.

ENGLISH
operations

or

listen to.

ENGLISH
USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 18).
Cautions:
10

ENGLISH
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
11

ENGLISH
number button 3.
1


*1 Selectable only when the 2

source is “CD-CH.”
*2 Selectable only when the
media is MP3, WMA, or
USB. Each time you press the button, you can
skip 10 tracks.
• CD-CH (only for MP3): If you select the selected and vice versa.
current disc (highlighted on the display),
its Folder List appears.
• If you select the current folder 3
(highlighted on the display), its File List
appears.
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
12
EN06-13KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 12 12/28/05 7:10:14 PM

ENGLISH
procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
13

ENGLISH
80 Hz are cut off.

120 Hz are cut off.
C VolAdjust
[–5 to +5]
FM sound level.
D Loudness
display.
by pressing:
4/¢ :
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
display.
14

ENGLISH
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
To display the rest

frequency.
width.
15

Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High

FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz



display.

To display the rest
16

ENGLISH
Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
CLOCK
Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]

Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
DISPLAY

legible.

17

ENGLISH

DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
TUNER

remain.
the above, [26].
AUDIO

COLOR

18

ENGLISH


or

19

ENGLISH


3 Select a folder.
2
5 Select a file.
step 4 on page 19

20

ENGLISH





19
21

ENGLISH

number button 3.

is selected

beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*

number button 3.
22

ENGLISH



page 18.
4 Select a color.


23

3 Assign a title.
ENGLISH

Maximum number of
Sources
characters

number button 3.

(see page 18).


of this unit.
24

ENGLISH


~

beginning)
For D. player:


D. player) playback

25

ENGLISH

menu, press 5.

automatically.
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Off: Cancels.
“MENU.”

operations
[ ].
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

26

Disc operations
ENGLISH
not be recommended.
General
pages 14 – 16.)
the disc.

27

ENGLISH

MP3 PRO format.
format.
files.
ATRAC3, etc.
not constant.
28

ENGLISH
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
(MPEG-2.5)
for animations;
display).

29

ENGLISH
source. assignment.
Capital letters
animation.
frame).
Small letters
frames.
frames.
Numbers and symbols
correctly.
characters.
“Volume 30.”
30

ENGLISH
use.
To keep discs clean

To play new discs
Connector

31

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
MP3/WMA playback
the file names.

display).
32

ENGLISH
MP3/WMA playback
track.
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
CD changer
display.

33

ENGLISH
CD changer

the display.
PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

this unit.
this unit.
34

Specifications
ENGLISH
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
0°C to +40°C
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
without notice.
35

EN, TH
Rear_KD-G825[U_UH]f.indd 2 12/23/05 11:18:45 AM

KD-G825
°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß/§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß
[U/UH] EN, TH
ENGLISH ‰∑¬
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È‰¥È√—∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æ◊ËÕ„™Èß“π°—∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øøÈ“ “¬¥‘π¢—È«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑Ï À“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õß§ÿ≥‰¡Ë‰
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers. ¥È„™È√–∫∫π’È µÈÕß„™È‡§√◊ËÕß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™Ë«¬ ´÷Ëß “¡“√∂À“´◊ÈÕ‰¥È®“°√È“π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕß‡ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC
WARNINGS §”‡µ◊Õπ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π°“√‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√ ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀÈª≈¥¢—È«·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë≈∫ÕÕ° ·≈È«®÷ßµËÕ “¬‰ø°ËÕπµ‘¥µ—Èß‡§√◊ËÕß
electrical connections before installing the unit. • µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È‡¥‘π “¬¥‘πµËÕ√–À«Ë“ß‡§√◊ËÕß°—∫µ—«∂—ß √∂¬πµÏ„À¡Ë·≈È«À≈—ß®“°µ‘¥µ—Èß
À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:
Notes: • „™Èæ‘°—¥®”‡æ“–·∑πøî« À“°øî« Ï¢“¥∫ËÕ¬ „ÀÈª√÷°…“√È“ π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕß‡ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀÈµËÕ≈”‚æß ∑’Ë¡’°”≈—ß¢—∫ ß ÿ¥‡°‘π°«Ë“ 50 W (∑—Èß¥È“πÀπÈ“·≈–¥È“πÀ≈—ß ¡’§Ë“§«“¡µÈ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂÷ß 8 Ω)
dealer. ∂È“°”≈—ß¢—∫µË”°«Ë“ 50 W „ÀÈ‡ª≈’Ë¬π§Ë“ “Amp Gain” ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„ÀÈ≈”‚æß™”√ÿ¥ (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 18 §”·π–π”)
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear
• °“√ªÈÕß°—π°“√≈—¥«ß®√ ®–µÈÕßæ—π¢—È« “¬µ–°—Ë« ∑’Ë‰¡Ë„™È·≈È«¥È«¬‡∑ ªæ—π “¬‰ø
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change
• ·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ®–√ÈÕπ¡“°À≈—ß®“°„™È √–¡—¥√–«—ßÕ¬Ë“‰ª —¡º— ‡¡◊ËÕ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: ¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß ”À√—∫°“√µËÕ·À≈Ëß®Ë“¬°”≈—ß·≈–≈”‚æß:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit • Õ¬Ë“µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢È“°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµÏ ¡‘©–π—Èπ ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥È√—∫§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬¡“°
will be seriously damaged. • °ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢È“°—∫≈”‚æß „ÀÈµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥‘π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õß§ÿ≥„ÀÈ‡√’¬∫√ÈÕ¬‡ ’¬°ËÕπ
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection √“¬°“√ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√—∫µ‘¥µ—Èß·≈–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—π

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È À“°¡’ ‘Ëß„¥‰¡Ë§√∫ °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“µ—«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‡§√◊ËÕß‡ ’¬ßµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏ‚¥¬∑—π∑’
immediately.
A/B C D
≈—ß∫√√®ÿ/ÀπÈ“ª—¥ ª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡ ·ºËπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µËß
E F G H
“¬‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß ª√–‡°Áπ«ß·À«π (ø5) πÕµ≈ÁÕ§ (M5) ≈—°µ‘¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)
I J K L M
¬“ß°—π°√–·∑° §—π∫—ß§—∫ √’‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈ ·∫µ‡µÕ√ (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
·ºËπ CD-ROM
(‚ª√·°√¡ Image Converter:Ver 3.0)
KD-G825_006A.indd 1 12/19/05 2:20:47 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) °“√µ‘¥µ—Èß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡Ï‡¢È“)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information ¿“æµ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’È· ¥ß∂÷ß°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß·∫∫∑—Ë«‰ª À“°§ÿ≥¡’ª—≠À“À√◊ÕµÈÕß°“√¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡°’Ë¬«°—∫™ÿ¥µ‘¥µ—Èß °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“°—∫ºŸÈ¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕß‡ ’
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC ¢Õß∑Ë“πÀ√◊Õ∫√‘…—
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂È“§ÿ≥‰¡Ë·πË„®«Ë“µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë „ÀÈÀ“™Ë“ßºŸÈ‡™’Ë¬«™“≠‡ªÁπºŸÈµ‘¥µ—Èß

µËÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑’Ë°”Àπ¥‰«È∑—ÈßÀ¡¥
*1 When you stand the unit, be

careful not to damage the fuse
on the rear.
*1 ‡¡◊ËÕ§ÿ≥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫¢÷Èπ √–«—ßÕ¬Ë“
∑”„ÀÈø‘« Ï∫√‘‡«≥ Ë«π∑È“¬‡ ’¬À“¬ sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºËπ‡æ◊ËÕ¬÷¥ª≈Õ°„ÀÈµËÕ°—π‡¢È“∑’Ë
Removing the unit °“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. °ËÕπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „ÀÈª≈¥ÀπÈ“µ—¥ Ë«π∑È“¬°ËÕπ

„ Ë§—π∫—ß§—∫ 2 Õ—π≈ß„π√ËÕß ”À√—∫„™Èæ—π≈«¥ ¥—ß¿“æ ®“°π—Èπ
„ÀÈ‡≈◊ËÕπ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ° „π¢≥–∑’Ë§ËÕ¬ Ê ¥÷ß§—π∫—ß§—∫∑—Èß Õß
Õ—πÕÕ°®“°°—π
When using the optional stay / ‡¡◊ËÕ„™Èµ—«¬÷¥·∫∫‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡Ë„™Èª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡
Fire wall
ºπ—ß°—π‰ø Stay (option) µ—«Õ¬Ë“ß‡™Ëπ „π√∂¬πµÏ‚µ‚¬µÈ“ „ÀÈ∂Õ¥«‘∑¬ÿµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏÕÕ°°ËÕπ ·≈ô«®÷ßµ‘¥µíôß‡§√◊ËÕßπ’ô‡¢ô“·∑π∑’Ë
µ—«¬÷¥ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2 *2 Not supplied for this unit.
°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡. )*2 *2 ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È
Dashboard
·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡á Bracket*2
Screw (option)
·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫*2
°√Ÿ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È) Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Pocket
°–‡ª“–
Bracket*2
·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑’Ë¡ÿ¡µË”°«Ë“ 30˚ Õß»“
À¡“¬‡Àµ : ‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫‰«È „ÀÈ„™È °√Ÿ¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂È“„™È °√Ÿ¬“«°«Ë“π’ÈÕ“®∑”„ÀÈ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥ô
TROUBLESHOOTING °“√µ√«® Õ∫ª—≠À“¢—¥¢ÈÕß
• The fuse blows. • ø‘« Ï¢“¥
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * ¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’¥”·≈– ’·¥ßÕ¬Ë“ß∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• Power cannot be turned on. • ‰¡Ë “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕß‰¥È
* Is the yellow lead connected? * ¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’‡À≈◊ÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• No sound from the speakers. • ‰¡Ë¡’‡ ’¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æß‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• Sound is distorted.
• ‡ ’¬ß‡æ’È¬π
* “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ß¥‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
* “¬¢—È«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥È“π´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ß¥‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? • ‡ ’¬ß√∫°«π
* ¡’°“√„™È “¬ —ÈπÊ À√◊ÕÀπ“Ê µËÕ®“°‡§√◊ËÕß «π∑’Ëµ‘¥µ—Èß ‰«È∫πæ◊Èπ¥È“πÀ≈—ß°—∫µ—«∂—ß√∂¬πµÏÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• This unit become hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√ÈÕπ¢÷Èπ
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ß¥‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
* “¬¢—È«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥È“π´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ß¥‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
• This unit does nos work at all.
* Have you reset your unit? • ‡§√◊ËÕß√—∫π’È∑”ß“π‰¡
* ∑Ë“π‰¥Èµ—Èß‡§√◊ËÕß„À¡Ë·≈È«À√◊Õ¬—ß
2
KD-G825_006A.indd 2 12/19/05 2:20:57 PM

ENGLISH ‰∑¬
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡‚¥¬„™È ‰øøÈ“

A Typical connections / °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ·∫∫ª°µ
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious °ËÕ•∑”°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥‘•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÏÕ¬Ë“ß•–¡—¥•–«—Õ¬Ë“„ÀÈº‘¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ™ÿ¥ª•–°Õ•™ÿ¥•’
damage to this unit. °“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕº‘¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„ÀÈ‡°‘¥§«“¡‡†’¬À“¬•È“¬·•ß°—•™ÿ¥ª•–
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color. °Õ••’È‰¥È“•µ–°—Ë«¢Õß†“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕÿª°••ÏµËÕ‡™•ËÕ¡®“°µ—«• ß••Õ“®¡’’ ∑’Ë‰¡Ë‡À¡•Õ•°—
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below. 1 µËÕ “¬‰ø ’µ“¡≈”¥—∫∑’Ë√–∫ÿ„π√Ÿª¥È“π≈Ë“ß
2 Connect the antenna cord. 2 ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫“¬Õ“°“»
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit. 3 ÿ¥∑È“¬ µËÕ Ë«π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥‘π “¬‰ø‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π’È
Antenna Connector
∑’ËµËÕ ”À√—∫ “¬Õ“°“»
™ËÕß‡ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√Ï(¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
15 A fuse
ø‘« Ï¢π“¥ 15 A
*1 ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È «‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥
®ÿ¥‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ “¬¥‘π¥È“πÀ≈—ß
Line out (see diagram ) Black

“¬ÕÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ ) ’¥” To metallic body or chassis of the car
µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™ ´‘ ¢Õß√∂¬πµá
To CD changer or another external component (see diagram )
™ËÕß‡ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ´’¥ CD ≈À–Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡‘ )
Yellow *2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
’‡À≈◊Õß *2 (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µËÕ°—∫¢—È«∑’Ë¡’°√–· ‰øøÈ“„π·ºßø‘« Ï ´÷ËßµËÕ°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµ
(‚¥¬‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È «‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥) (12 ‚«≈∑Ï§ß∑’Ë)
Fuse block
Red ·ºßø‘«
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise ’·¥ß To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
power cannot be turned on. µËÕ°—∫¢—È« Ë«πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø‘«
*2 °ËÕπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È°ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µ‘¥µ—Èß
µÈÕßµËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«π’È°ËÕπ ¡‘©–π—Èπ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕß‰¥
Blue
»’øÈ“ To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øøÈ“Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘ À“°¡’ (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 250 mA)

’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“« To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 200 mA)

’ È¡·∂∫¢“« To car light control switch
«‘µ´Ï§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√Ï
Brown
’πÈ”µ“≈ To cellular phone system
µËÕ°—∫‚∑√»—æ∑Ï‡§≈◊ËÕπ∑’Ë
’¢“«·∂∫¥” ’¢“« ’‡∑“·∂∫¥” ’‡∑“ ’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥” ’‡¢’¬« ’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥” ’¡Ë«ß
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (ÀπÈ“) ≈”‚æß¢«“ (ÀπÈ“) ≈”‚æß´È“¬ (À≈—ß) ≈”‚æß¢«“ (À≈—ß)
KD-G825_006A.indd 3 12/23/05 4:21:31 PM

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / µËÕ·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï·≈–/À√◊Õ´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√Ï¥È“ππÕ°
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system. §ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï ‰¥ÈÀ≈“¬µ—«‡æ◊ËÕ‡æ‘Ë¡§ÿ≥¿“æ‡ ’¬ß„ÀÈ°—∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ„π√∂¬πµÏ
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
• µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«√–¬–‰°≈ ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢È“°—∫ “¬µ–°—Ë«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊Ëπ Ê ‡æ◊ËÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker °Õ∫π’È‰¥È
leads of this unit unused. • ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È ·≈È«µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫‡§√◊ËÕß¢¬“¬ ∑‘Èß “¬µ–°—Ë«≈”‚æß¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È‰«È
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this – ≈—≠≠“≥ÕÕ°®“°‡§√◊ËÕß®–¬—ß§ßÕ¬ŸË„π√–¥—∫≈Ÿß ‡æ◊ËÕ„ÀÈ‡≈’¬ß∑’Ë‰¥È‡ªÁπ‡≈’¬ß‰Œ-‰ø
unit. ‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ° „ÀÈª‘¥ªÿË¡§«∫§ÿ¡Õ—µ√“¢¬“¬ ∑’Ë·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the ‡æ◊ËÕ„ÀÈ‡§√◊ËÕß¡’ª√– ‘∑∏‘¿“æ°“√∑”ß“π Ÿß ÿ¥È
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y (‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
Remote lead
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°•
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) µËÕ “¬°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÀ√◊Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘∂È“¡’
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)
Rear speakers
≈”‚æßÀ≈—ß
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplifier ‡§√◊ËÕß¢¬“¬‡ ’¬ß JVC
‡§√◊ËÕß¢¬“¬‡ ’¬ß JVC Subwoofer
´—∫«Ÿ‡øÕ√
Front speakers *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπÈ“ the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
≈”‚æßÀπÈ“ (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching
the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
JVC Amplifier *3 µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢È“°—∫µ—«∂—ß‡À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂

‡§√◊ËÕß¢¬“¬‡ ’¬ß JVC µ√ß Ë«π∑’Ë‰¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫ (À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË „ÀÈ¢Ÿ¥ ’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit) °ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’È
*4 “¬‡§‡∫‘≈ —≠≠“≥ (‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È) ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥ À√◊Õ‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥È
C Connecting the external components / °“√µËÕ‡æ‘Ë¡‡µ‘¡‡¢È“°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÊ
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD ‡™π‡®Õ√Ï, Apple iPod® À√◊Õ‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ JVC D.
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / µ—Èß§Ë“ “Changer” ‡ªìπ°“√§Ë“√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 18 §”·π–π”)
You can connect these components as illustrated below.
The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂µËÕÕÿª°√≥Ï¥—ß°≈Ë“«µ“¡¿“æ· ¥ß¥È“π≈Ë“ß
∑Ë“π “¡“√∂‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ iPod*5 À√◊Õ‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ D. ‚¥¬„™ÈÕπ‘ ‡∑Õ√Ï‡ø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï (‰¡Ë¡’¡“„ÀÈ)—KS-PD100 ( ”À√—∫ iPod) À√◊Õ KS-PD500 ( ”À√—∫‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ D.)
CAUTION / ¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß:
• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.
• °ËÕπ®–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° °√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕßÕ¬ŸË
Apple iPod (·¬°®”ÀπË“¬)
or
À√◊Õ JVC D. player (separately purchased)
‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ JVC D. (·¬°®”ÀπË“¬)
JVC CD changer
JVC CD ‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
CD changer jack
™ËÕß‡ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß
*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. *6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer
‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ CD
*5 iPod ‡ªÁπ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§È“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´÷Ëß®¥∑–‡∫’¬π°“√§È“„πª√–‡∑» À√—∞Õ‡¡√‘°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»Õ◊ËπÊ *6 µËÕ “¬∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“ ”À√—∫ CD ‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
Other external component / Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°Õ◊ËπÊ

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / µ—Èß§Ë“ “Ext In” ‡∫ªìπ°“√§Ë“√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 18 §”·π–π”)
External component
Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°

™ËÕß‡ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õß Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°
‡§√◊ËÕß‡≈Ëπ CD *7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*7 Õ·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï “¬ —≠≠“≥‡¢È“ KS-U57 (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)

¢—È«‡ ’¬∫¡‘π‘ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ¢π“¥ 3.5 ¡¡. *8 Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï√—∫ —≠≠“≥ AUX √ÿËπ KS-U58 (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)
KD-G825_006A.indd 4 12/19/05 2:21:00 PM

INDONESIA ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-G825
ALAT PENERIMA CD KD-G825

Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.

Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.
INSTRUCTIONS
BUKU PETUNJUK
GET0360-004A
[UN]
Cover_KD-G825_004A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:30:14 pm

ENGLISH


mode.
Caution:
2

CONTENTS
ENGLISH
Getting started ................................. 6
one.
Press and hold both
operations .................................... 26
Maintenance .................................... 31
Warning:
dangerous.
unit.

Control panel
ENGLISH


Lever CAUTION:

ENGLISH
(CR2025)

equalizer).


5

5 SOURCE button
ENGLISH

held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
1

demonstrations
to “Off.”

hour.
display mode.

ENGLISH
~
Ÿ

stops.
again.
*2
In step ! above...

1

7

2 Manual presetting
ENGLISH


be lost.
3

number button 3.
want to store into.
2
2
3 Select “SSM.”

band.

ENGLISH
operations

or

listen to.

ENGLISH
USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 18).
Cautions:
10

ENGLISH
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
11

ENGLISH
number button 3.
1



skip 10 tracks.
appears.
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
12

ENGLISH
procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
13

ENGLISH
80 Hz are cut off.

120 Hz are cut off.
C VolAdjust
[–5 to +5]
FM sound level.
D Loudness
display.
by pressing:
4/¢ :
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
display.
14

ENGLISH
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
To display the rest

frequency.
width.
15

Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High

FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz



display.

To display the rest
16

ENGLISH
Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
CLOCK
Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]

Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
DISPLAY

legible.

17

ENGLISH

DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
TUNER

remain.
the above, [26].
AUDIO

COLOR

18

ENGLISH


or

19

ENGLISH


3 Select a folder.
2
5 Select a file.
step 4 on page 19

20

ENGLISH





19
21

ENGLISH

number button 3.

is selected

beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*

number button 3.
22

ENGLISH



page 18.
4 Select a color.


23

3 Assign a title.
ENGLISH

Maximum number of
Sources
characters

number button 3.

(see page 18).


of this unit.
24

ENGLISH


~

beginning)
For D. player:


D. player) playback

25

ENGLISH

menu, press 5.

automatically.
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Off: Cancels.
“MENU.”

operations
[ ].
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

26

Disc operations
ENGLISH
not be recommended.
General
pages 14 – 16.)
the disc.

27

ENGLISH

MP3 PRO format.
format.
files.
ATRAC3, etc.
not constant.
28

ENGLISH
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
(MPEG-2.5)
for animations;
display).

29

ENGLISH
source. assignment.
Capital letters
animation.
frame).
Small letters
frames.
frames.
Numbers and symbols
correctly.
characters.
“Volume 30.”
30

ENGLISH
use.
To keep discs clean

To play new discs
Connector

31

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
MP3/WMA playback
the file names.

display).
32

ENGLISH
MP3/WMA playback
track.
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
CD changer
display.

33

ENGLISH
CD changer

the display.
PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

this unit.
this unit.
34

Specifications
ENGLISH
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
0°C to +40°C
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
without notice.
35

Ada MASALAH dengan cara

pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
Rear_KD-G825_004A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:30:05 pm

ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER KD-G825
KD-G825
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0360-005A
[UT]

ENGLISH


mode.
Caution:
2

CONTENTS
ENGLISH
Getting started ................................. 6
one.
Press and hold both
operations .................................... 26
Maintenance .................................... 31
Warning:
dangerous.
unit.

Control panel
ENGLISH


Lever CAUTION:

ENGLISH
(CR2025)

equalizer).


5

5 SOURCE button
ENGLISH

held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
1

demonstrations
to “Off.”

hour.
display mode.

ENGLISH
~
Ÿ

stops.
again.
*2
In step ! above...

1

7

2 Manual presetting
ENGLISH


be lost.
3

number button 3.
want to store into.
2
2
3 Select “SSM.”

band.

ENGLISH
operations

or

listen to.

ENGLISH
USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 18).
Cautions:
10

ENGLISH
For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
11

ENGLISH
number button 3.
1



skip 10 tracks.
appears.
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
12

ENGLISH
procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
13

ENGLISH
80 Hz are cut off.

120 Hz are cut off.
C VolAdjust
[–5 to +5]
FM sound level.
D Loudness
display.
by pressing:
4/¢ :
the music genre.
B Subwoofer
display.
14

ENGLISH
1 200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
or Q1.5 Q1.0
To display the rest

frequency.
width.
15

Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High

FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz



display.

To display the rest
16

ENGLISH
Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM (0 – 23), [6]
CLOCK
Clock Min 00 – 59, [6]

Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
DISPLAY

legible.

17

ENGLISH

DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
TUNER

remain.
the above, [26].
AUDIO

COLOR

18

ENGLISH


or

19

ENGLISH


3 Select a folder.
2
5 Select a file.
step 4 on page 19

20

ENGLISH





19
21

ENGLISH

number button 3.

is selected

beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*

number button 3.
22

ENGLISH



page 18.
4 Select a color.


23

3 Assign a title.
ENGLISH

Maximum number of
Sources
characters

number button 3.

(see page 18).


of this unit.
24

ENGLISH


~

beginning)
For D. player:


D. player) playback

25

ENGLISH

menu, press 5.

automatically.
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Off: Cancels.
“MENU.”

operations
[ ].
[ ].
pages 24 – 26.
Off: Cancels.

26

Disc operations
ENGLISH
not be recommended.
General
pages 14 – 16.)
the disc.

27

ENGLISH

MP3 PRO format.
format.
files.
ATRAC3, etc.
not constant.
28

ENGLISH
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2)
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
(MPEG-2.5)
for animations;
display).

29

ENGLISH
source. assignment.
Capital letters
animation.
frame).
Small letters
frames.
frames.
Numbers and symbols
correctly.
characters.
“Volume 30.”
30

ENGLISH
use.
To keep discs clean

To play new discs
Connector

31

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
MP3/WMA playback
the file names.

display).
32

ENGLISH
MP3/WMA playback
track.
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
CD changer
display.

33

ENGLISH
CD changer

the display.
PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

this unit.
this unit.
34

Specifications
ENGLISH
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
0°C to +40°C
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
without notice.
35

EN, CT
Rear_KD-G825_005A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:30:39 pm

KD-G825
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
[UN] EN, IN
ENGLISH INDONESIA
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers. kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli
di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.
WARNINGS PERINGATAN
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
electrical connections before installing the unit. baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
Notes: Catatan:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
dealer. penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear • Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS). dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “Amp Gain” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape. dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 18 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit. • Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan alat penerima ini.
Heat sink
Pendingin
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit sambungan-sambungan speaker:
will be seriously damaged. • JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
your car. • SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
Parts list for installation and connection Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada item yang hilang, segera hubungi
immediately. dealer audio mobil JVC anda.
A/B C D
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol Selongsong Plat rapi
E F G H
Kabel power Perapat sambungan (ø5) Mur kunci (M5) Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)
I J K L M
Bantalan karet Pegangan-pegangan Pengontrol jauh Baterai (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
CD-ROM
Instal1-2_KD-G825[UN]3.indd 1 8/12/05 7:39:47 pm

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits. informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician. atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan
teknisi yang berkualitas.

Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan
listrik yang diperlukan.

fuse on the rear.
*1 Ketika anda memberdirikan
alat penerima, hati-hati
untuk tidak merusak sekring Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
di belakang. sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang
tepat untuk menahan selongsong
secara kuat pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit Memindahkan alat penerima

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.

Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik alat
penerima seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga
alat penerima dapat dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima
penguat tambahan tanpa menggunakan selongsong
Fire wall Stay (option) Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Dinding tahan api Penguat (tambahan)

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2 *2 Not supplied for this unit.
Dashboard *2 Tidak termasuk untuk alat penerima ini.
Tempat alat pada Bracket*2
bagian depan Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan) Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚. used, they could damage the unit.
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang dari 30˚. Catatan : Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-skrup panjang–8 mm.
Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.
TROUBLESHOOTING PEMECAHAN MASALAH

• The fuse blows. • Sekring meledak.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on. • Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers. • Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted. • Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds. • Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? * Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek
• This unit become hot. dan tertebal?
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • Alat penerima menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
• This unit does nos work at all. * Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
* Have you reset your unit? • Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?
2

ENGLISH INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK

A Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang
damage to this unit. tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color. Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below. 1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Connect the antenna cord. 2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit. 3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.
Antenna connector
Konektor antena To subwoofer (see diagram )
Ke subwoofer ( lihat diagram )
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
*1 Tidak termasuk untuk alat penerima ini. Saklar kontak
Terminal tanah belakang
Line out (see diagram )

Black
Keluaran (lihat diagram )
Hitam
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut

Ke CD changer atau komponen luar yang lain (lihat diagram )
Yellow*2
Kuning*2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke
baterai mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Red Blok sekring
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise Merah
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
*2 Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima
ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah
dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)

Biru dengan strip putih
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)

Oranye dengan strip putih
Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil
Brown
Coklat
Ke sistem telepon selular
White with black White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black Green Purple with black stripe Purple
stripe Putih Abu-abu dengan strip Abu-abu stripe Hijau Ungu dengan strip Ungu
Putih dengan strip hitam Hijau dengan strip hitam
hitam hitam
Speaker kiri (depan) Speaker kanan (depan) Speaker kiri (belakang) Speaker kanan (belakang)

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system. Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it • Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
can be controlled through this unit. dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker • Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.
leads of this unit unused. Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this – Level jalur output dari radio ini tetap tinggi untuk memelihara suara hi-fi yang telah di hasilkan
unit. dari radio ini.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the Ketika menyambung sebuah penguat eksternal ke radio ini, kecilkan kontrol gain pada
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit. penguat eksternal untuk mendapatkan hasil terbaik dari radio ini.

Konektor Y (tidak disuplai untuk alat penerima ini)
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)
Rear speakers
Speaker-speaker belakang
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplifier Penguat JVC
Penguat JVC Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Front speakers *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body
Front speakers Speaker-speaker depan or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated
Speaker-speaker depan with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint
before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause
damage to the unit.
JVC Amplifier *3 Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi
Penguat JVC atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit) dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum
*4 Kabel sinyal (tidak disuplai untuk alat memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin
penerima ini) menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.
C Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD changer, Apple iPod® atau JVC D. player
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “Changer” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 18 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)
Anda bisa menyambungkan komponen-komponen ini seperti yang diilustrasikan di bawah.
iPod*5 atau D. player bisa disambungkan dengan mengunakan adaptor antarmuka (tidak disediakan)—KS-PD100 (untuk iPod) atau KS-PD500 (untuk D. player).
CAUTION / PERINGATAN: Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off. Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)
Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.
or
atau JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. player (dibeli terpisah)
JVC CD changer
CD changer JVC
CD changer jack
Konektor CD changer
*5 iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di *6 Penyambung sinyal disediakan untuk CD changer
negara-negara lain. anda
Other external component / Komponen eksternal lainnya

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “Ext In” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 18 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)
External component
Komponen eksternal

Konektor CD changer Komponen eksternal *7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*7 Adapter Input Saluran KS-U57 (tidak disediakan untuk
alat penerima ini)
Steker mini stereo 3.5 mm *8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
*8 Adapter Input AUX KS-U58 (tidak disediakan untuk alat
penerima ini)
Instal3-4_KD-G825[UN]f.indd 4 12/28/05 6:08:40 PM

KD-G825
ϰ༬௥ો˿̱
[UT] EN, CT
ENGLISH ˁ̂
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does ʹጅ෮̈́՟·‫ޠڈ‬12 V é࠸๩ોϚ‫ྑڅ‬ກԧ஁éϨ‫س‬઱‫ڄ‬ԾቩԅЉ௠ɾྐ຀Ԧ஀ç۱ᄔ࠱ɾࡴྐ
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers. Ꮻ᜵ಗ዇ç̣̈́ϚJVCԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé
WARNINGS ᙲѿ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all ޴Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃‫ۮ‬çᔃළྐЖ‫࠷ڄ‬๨çՓӕ‫׿‬Љྐཔ௲௤૊Ϧé
electrical connections before installing the unit. ëϰ༬ҭ୙݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆ‫څ‬Ϛሉࡍ๙ોгԿԾê
ٍิ!
Notes: ëӕۘᎳീӦಗ޴ᖃ‫࠷׆‬மࡩ‫ۘڄ‬ᎳീéϨ‫ۘس‬Ꮃീ໩ગጛᖢçቁώJVCԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ༿੕é
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio ë݈໯֜‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇‫ڄ‬ఛʨ᎔ʈ̷୊ᏻʨ‫ؠ‬50 Wçմ‫ۇ‬ӏ޴4 Ω - 8 ΩéϨ‫س‬ఛʨ̷୊ʮ‫ؠ‬
dealer. 50 Wçቁቆओ“Amp Gain”௎‫ࡩ׆‬ç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ዇๑ᖢé੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫୶ڄ‬18ࡗé
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear ë޴Վ̊ྐ຀ഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸уͶՠΈྐለ‫ڄ‬ၷʪé
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change ëʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ̕๡݃ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ࠱᙮ညಞᇊ̕é
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
ಞᇊ̕
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิ՗ො!

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit ë˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆ๢ᘸࡍ๒ᖣê
will be seriously damaged. ëϚӕಙᑵ዇዗ለ૊Ꮓ૊вಙᑵ዇˃‫ۮ‬çᐓ‫ފ‬઱ԆԾʕ‫ڄ‬ಙᑵ዇ለཔé
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection Έ‫ء‬ϰ༬֝௥ો‫ྒྷڅ‬έ჋

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer ʓλྒάᎲʹጅಏաéࠜЉέщ᎝းçቁΘո‫۽‬༿઱‫ڄ‬JVCԆԾࡖᛏ໩ኀੋé
immediately.
A/B C D
ഢୢ૆վࡒ‫ػ‬ ͙ࢭጅೋ ༫ྟख
E F G H
ྐཔ௤૊·‫ڄ‬਎ለӧ ࿑੡(ø5) ᕬ‫׆‬ᒘ͹(M5) ႌ֣ᒘन(M5 × 20 mm)
I J K L M
ጁሗՎ኏࿑ ‫ػ‬଍‫ܓ‬ӕ˾ ჲ૆዇ ྐЖ (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
CD-ROM
(ᅬྰᕢಗ዇íVer 3.0)
KD-G825_010A.indd 1 12/19/05 4:16:19 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) ϰ༬༬௏é֤‫ׇ‬ϛᄮ‫˗ؼڸ‬
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information ʓࡒ‫ڄ‬࿌༱‫ڷ‬Εʄյ‫ڄܓ‬ϯ༫ദҺéϨ‫س‬઱Љ੕ᖅç‫׻‬ᄔ࠱Љᘕ਎ࢭ˔ά‫ڄ‬ཊऄçቁώJVC
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits. ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ‫׻‬਎ࢭ˔άաᏻ˙͌༿੕é
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician. ëϨ‫س‬઱ʿ঻ᇧ‫׆‬Ϩщ͸ᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐत‫ڄ‬ӑிʆ࢜գϯ༫é

නм‫׿‬ᄔ‫ྐڄ‬པ௤૊é

fuse on the rear.
*1 ઱቎৹ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ࠱
๑ᖢ‫נ‬௰‫ۘڄ‬Ꮃീé

Ҿᛮጅೋ‫ߴڄ‬дçӕ͙ࢭጅೋԕ֣Ϛᄭ
‫˖ػڷ‬é
Removing the unit ‫؜‬։͵ጆ

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Ϛ‫؛‬ֈʹጅ‫ۮ‬çᏻઅʹጅ݈௰‫֜׆֣ڄ‬௤૊௰˜ᖑළé

‫ݝ‬࿌‫׿‬Εçઅղ̕‫ػ‬଍‫ܓ‬ӕ˾಍ʈ̿ᆥç೸
݈ძᗌϙનղ਴ώ͙‫؁‬ղ̕ӕ˾çʹጅᎲ˃
‫̳؁‬é
When using the optional stay / ࠝ᎛Έ́ᆊ‫ނ‬ When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ࠝˀՠΈ͚ࢮጆೌϰ༬͵ጆ
̣ᕙΉ೻(TOYOTA) ԆԾ޴բ ࡛ζ֊̳ԆԾЂࡖጅç೸݈અʹጅ༫ʈմ‫ڄ̳ڏ‬т໯é
Fire wall Stay (option)
Վ̑‫ػ‬ ̀ᆉ‫ށ‬᎚·‫ڄ‬
ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*2
*2 Not supplied for this unit.
Dashboard *2 ʿᎲʹጅಏաé
ᄭ‫ػڷ‬ Bracket*2
Ёࣙ*2
Screw (option)
ᒘീਐ᎚·‫ڄ‬ Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
‫ڏ‬ೋ
Bracket*2
Ёࣙ*2
અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲‫ؠ‬30˚‫ڄ‬Դܾé ٍิ !ӕʹጅϯ༫ϚЁࣙʕइçੀͫ՟·8 mm‫ڄۂ‬ᒘീਐéϨ՟·ཫ‫ڄۂ‬ᒘീਐç๡๑ᖢʹጅé
TROUBLESHOOTING ‫ݮ‬ᄑ૜ਜ
• The fuse blows. •ۙᎴുጜᔄê
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? *ᐓ‫߹ފ‬и዗ለ૊Ꮓ֜෨и዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊᙮͸ᇧ%
• Power cannot be turned on. •ྑກˀ়ો௣ê
* Is the yellow lead connected? *ᐓ‫ފ‬෦и዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ʕ%
• No sound from the speakers. •ಚᑶወԆЊᑶࡗê
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? *ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵഠཔ%
• Sound is distorted. •ᑶࡗ͜ॳê
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? *ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ϙ%
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? *ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇‫(ͣڄ‬L)è͆(R) ၷʪ‫࠷ڄ‬๨(–) ‫ݵ‬Ѵθψ૊ϙ%
• Noise interfere with sounds. •዇ࡗʹᓿࡗᛐê
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? *݈૊ϙၷʪႩԾԽ‫ݵ‬Ѵ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹‫ྐڄ‬ለ௤૊%
• This unit become hot.
•͵ጆഛᇋê
*ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ϙ%
*ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇‫(ͣڄ‬L)è͆(R) ၷʪ‫࠷ڄ‬๨(–) ‫ݵ‬Ѵθψ૊ϙ%
• This unit does nos work at all.
* Have you reset your unit? •͵ጆҭθˀ়ይіê
*઱‫ݵ‬Ѵʵ໩ࡌ໯઱‫ڄ‬ጅஇ%
2
KD-G825_010A.indd 2 12/19/05 4:16:42 PM

ENGLISH ˁ̂
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ྑཕ௥ો

A Typical connections / ն‫څܔ‬ોሉ̅٘
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious ોሉ‫̥!ۯ‬அᐓ‫ފ‬ԆԾ˖‫ڄ‬ለཔéʿ͸ᇧ‫ڄ‬૊ለ๡዗ࠓʹጅᘷࡌ๑ᖢé
damage to this unit. ྐʍለ‫˺ڄ‬ለ֜ԾԽ‫ڄ‬௤૊዇˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́঻Љ‫׿‬ʿψé
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 ՜ຖʓ࿌‫׿‬Ε˃ЎҺ௤૊ྐ຀ለ‫ڄ‬ᖄи዗ለé
2 અ˭ለ‫ྐڄ‬ለ௤૊৹գé
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 ఛ݈çӕ਎ለӧ‫ڄ‬಍Ꮓ಍Ϛʹጅʕé
Antenna Connector
˭ለ௤૊዇ To subwoofer (see diagram )
૊вඟࡌјࡖಙᑵ዇੉ኌ࿌‫ڷ‬ )
15 A fuse
15 AۘᎳീ
*1 ʿᎲʹጅಏաé ᓭ̑ළᘕ
ʹጅ݈ࠌ૊ϙၷʪ
Line out (see diagram )

Black
᎔̳ၷʪ੉ኌ࿌‫ڷ‬
෨и
૊в‫ہ‬ᚙᝂ‫׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟ

௤૊вCD ಗၪ዇‫׻‬մ̧͙௰இά(੉ኌ࿌‫ ڷ‬
Yellow *2
෦и*2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖‫ۈڄ‬ᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔‫ؠ‬Ծ༫ྐЖߟ௤૊
·‫ؠ‬अཔᓭ̑ළᘕ‫׆ݔ‬12 V
Fuse block
Red ۘᎳീవ˔
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise ߹и
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖‫ۈڄ‬ᚙၷʪ
*2 ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕ‫ٶ‬ٜᐓ‫ۮ˃ފ‬ç
ͫෝӕ௠዗ለ૊ʕçѴ۱ʿ঻ළ૧ྐ຀é
Blue
ᕇи
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
૊вбੂ˭ለࠜЉ༫௎ఛʨ250 mA

ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ
௤૊в͏ɾ‫ށ‬ᄭ዇‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለఛʨ200 mA

ዻиઘЉΎи଍ঙ
௤૊вԆԾԾጜ૆վළᘕ
Brown
ሶи
૊в˾ጅԦ஀
White with black stripe White Gray with black stripe Gray Green with black Green Purple with black stripe Purple
ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ Ύи НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ Ни stripe ႋи ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ ാи
ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ
ͣಙᑵ዇‫ۮ‬໯ ͆ಙᑵ዇‫ۮ‬໯ ͣಙᑵ዇݈໯ ͆ಙᑵ዇݈໯
KD-G825_010A.indd 3 12/19/05 4:16:52 PM

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / ௥ો͚ો‫؟‬ʩወ֝ƅ‫׼‬චࡍљࡗಚᑶወ
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system. ઱̣̈́௤૊‫؞‬ʨ዇̣˥ঠ઱‫ڄ‬ԆԾΘᝂᑵԦ஀é
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it ëઅჲ૆዗ለᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ֜մ̧༫໯ʕ‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ௤૊৹գç̣‫̣̈́۔‬௢ཫʹጅනм
can be controlled through this unit. ჲ૆é
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker ëઆಚᑶወ֝͵ጆᔄෆèκોʖ̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወêઆ͵ጆ‫څ‬ಚᑶወોሉ‫؟‬໰ˀΈê
leads of this unit unused. – ʹጅ‫ڄ‬᎔̳ၷʪ̐ͦۘ‫ݠ‬ਢ̣̐ͦۘॡਢܾ෭ॲࡖᛏं‫س‬ιЎ୕Άé
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this ັ௥ો͚௱̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወг͵ጆईçቁᕢј͙௰̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇‫ڄ‬ϯ੮࠳૆վ̣‫۔‬ᐺ֊ʹጅ‫׿‬ചಓ
unit. ‫ڄ‬ఛ՞ं‫س‬é
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit.

Y-‫ܓ‬௤૊዗ለʿᎲʹጅಏա
Remote lead
ჲ૆዗ለ
To the remote lead of other equipment or auto antenna if any
௤૊в͏ɾ‫ށ‬ᄭ዇‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ‫׻‬бੂ˭ለࠜЉ༫௎
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
ჲ૆዗ለᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ
Rear speakers
݈໯ಙᑵ዇
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplifier JVC ̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ
JVC ̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ Subwoofer
ඟࡌјࡖಙᑵ዇
Front speakers *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body
Front speakers ‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇ or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated
‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇ with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint
before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause
damage to the unit.
JVC Amplifier *3 અϙለႩ‫ہ‬ᚙԾᝂ‫ږ׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊
JVC ̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ ளᏻ༳ԅЉூٛွᕒႵϨ‫س‬ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit) ૊ྐለ‫ۮ‬çઅٛွս̓éϨ‫س‬ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡
*4 ‫ྐ༙ۑ‬ងʿᎲʹጅಏա ๑ᖢʹጅé
C Connecting the external components / ௥ોյ̨͚௱ஈέ
CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CDಘၫወéApple iPod® ‫׼‬JVC D. player

• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏‫ׇ‬௏г“Changer” (ಘၫወ) (੊ኍՠΈკ‫ب‬ऐ‫୷څ‬18 ࡘê)
઱̣̈́નʓ࿌‫׿‬Ε௤૊௠՗இάé
઱̣̈́՟·ߍࡒቱ਎዇ʿ਎క—KS-PD100 (iPod·‫׻‬KS-PD500* player·௤૊iPod*5 ‫ *׻‬playeré
CAUTION / ʯ˼î
Before connecting the external components , make sure that the unit is turned off.
Apple iPod ͏͙ᒯ໯
௤૊͙௰இά˃‫ۮ‬çζᇧ‫ʹ׆‬ጅʵ໩ᘕ௻é
or
‫׻‬ JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. player ͏͙ᒯ໯
JVC CD changer
JVC CDಘၫወ
CD changer jack
CDಗၪ዇಍ࣙ
*5 iPod ‫ݵ‬Apple Computer, Inc. ăᙧ‫ྐس‬༃˙͌ĄϚࠀ੢˪մ̧੢ࣁٌ̰‫ੋڄ‬ᆤé *6 ઱‫ڄ‬CD ಗၪ዇਎క‫ڄ‬௤૊ྐង
Other external component / յ̨͚௱ஈέ

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏‫ׇ‬௏г“Ext In” (͚௱᎕ʉ) (੊ኍՠΈკ‫ب‬ऐ‫୷څ‬18 ࡘê)
External component
͚௱ஈέ

CDಗၪ዇಍ࣙ ͚௱ஈέ
*7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
*7 ྐཔ᎔ʈቱ਎዇KS-U57 ʿᎲʹጅಏա
3.5 mm Θᝂᑵਁі಍ࣙ
*8 AUX᎔ʈቱ਎዇KS-U58 (ʿᎲʹጅಏա)
KD-G825_010A.indd 4 12/23/05 4:31:29 PM

FRANÇAIS ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER
RECEPTEUR CD
KD-G821

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GET0362-003A
[EX/EU]
Cover_KD-G821[EX_EU]2.indd 2 9/12/05 4:06:43 pm

ENGLISH


mode.

Caution:
EN02-05KD-G821[EX_EU]f.indd 2 22/12/05 6:53:55 pm

CONTENTS
ENGLISH
Getting started ................................. 6
Press either
one.
Maintenance .................................... 39
Specifications ................................... 43

output level. unit.
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and European countries

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is
imprinted on the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify
your unit if stolen.
3
EN02-05KD-G821[EX_EU]2.indd 3 9/12/05 3:51:45 pm

Control panel
ENGLISH


Lever CAUTION:

ENGLISH
(CR2025)

4 SOUND button
equalizer).


5

5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. !
ENGLISH

pressed briefly. • For FM/AM tuner
held.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if • For DAB tuner
pressed and held.
(in menu selecting mode): ⁄ Adjust the volume.
held.
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
remote control function. pages 17 – 19.)
• See the Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume) for connection.
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

Getting started again.

Basic operations
Ÿ Basic settings
19 – 22.
1

are not ready or not connected. 2-1 Canceling the display
demonstrations
to “Off.”

1 Press number button 4 ( ). *2
ENGLISH
hour.
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed.
“24Hours” or “12Hours,” time Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 20).
display mode.

To check the current clock time when the operation is performed for five seconds.
power is turned off
Radio operations
~
Ÿ

stops.

again.
7

ENGLISH
1
3 Select “SSM.”
4
receive
1
band.
Manual presetting

be lost.

2

3
number button 3.

ENGLISH
1
2


listen to.

FM RDS operations
following:

9

ENGLISH

code.
number button 3.
programme types
number button 3.
1

( ) repeatedly.
10
EN06-17KD-G821[EX_EU]2.indd 10 16/12/05 11:20:55 am

ENGLISH
goes off.

tuner.



activated.
11

ENGLISH
operations



~
PTY codes
Ÿ Select a disc.
12

ENGLISH
USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 21).
Cautions:
13

ENGLISH

For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
14

ENGLISH
number button 3.
1

1

skip 10 tracks.
“CD-CH.”
WMA, or USB.
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
15

ENGLISH

procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
16

ENGLISH
120 Hz are cut off.
160 Hz are cut off.
1 [–5 to +5]
FM sound level.
D Loudness
levels. [Off or On]
display.
by pressing:

number button 3.

17

width.
ENGLISH

+06 +06 +06
200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
Q1.5 Q1.0

frequency ranges.
number button 3.

frequency.
18

Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz



display.

To display the rest

19

ENGLISH

Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 0 – 23 (1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM), [7]
Clock Min 00 – 59, [7]
CLOCK

the RDS signal.
Off: Cancels.
DISPLAY
Off: Cancels.
20

ENGLISH
legible.
DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
same programme.
TUNER
set to “On”).
TA Volume 0 — 30 or 0 — 50*3, [11]
volume
sufficient.

21

ENGLISH

TUNER

remain.
the above, [30].
AUDIO

COLOR

22

ENGLISH
and movies.
supplied CD-ROM.
23

ENGLISH


2


3 Select a folder.
Deleting the files

5 Select a file.

step 4 on page 23
24

ENGLISH
23

2

the selection.

pictures.
25

ENGLISH

number button 3.

is selected

to step 3. time.
beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*

26

ENGLISH


beginning)

page 22.
4 Select a color.


27

ENGLISH
(Ext In).
entering the title.
Maximum number of
Sources
characters
4 Store the title.
30 discs)
components
WMA/USB.
number button 3.

(see page 22).
of this unit.
28

ENGLISH

Preparations:

Ÿ


For iPod:
beginning)
For D. player:
29

ENGLISH

menu, press 5.

automatically.
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Off: Cancels.
“MENU.”

operations
[ ].
[ ].
pages 28 – 30.
Off: Cancels.

30

ENGLISH

again.

What is DAB system?
the following:
AF” on page 22).
1
~

31

or 3).
ENGLISH
3

service. 2
PTY codes.
only.

store into.
each band.
number button 3.
32

ENGLISH
following)


services.

to listen to.
1

Standby Reception.
announcement type.

33

ENGLISH

Reception.
goes off. DLS....
Announcement types
Finance

hold DISP again.
34
EN28-35KD-G821[EX_EU]f.indd 34 22/12/05 9:09:31 am

ENGLISH
Basic operations
Inserting a disc
preset level.
sounds.
35

ENGLISH

WMA files.
while playing.
<.wma>).
inside the unit.
characters
313 or more.
damage to the unit.
MP3 PRO format.
not constant.
36

ENGLISH
– Bit rate:

WMA folder. source.
“CD.”

37

ENGLISH

• In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z,
frame).
a – z), the following characters will be used.
frames.
Upper case
frames.
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start Lower case
downloading.
Numbers and symbols
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any iPod or D. player operations
unit.
correctly.
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment communication between the iPod or
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 D. player and the unit.
station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name • If the text information includes more than
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
assignment. also page 20). This unit can display up to 40
characters.
38

ENGLISH
How to handle discs
Static PTY.
use.
Connector
Warped disc
39

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
the file names.
MP3/WMA playback

display).
40

ENGLISH
MP3/WMA playback

track.
symbols and special characters (see page 38).
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
display.
CD changer
the display.

41

ENGLISH

PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

this unit.
this unit.
display.
DAB
display.
42

Specifications
ENGLISH
Other Terminals: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
CD changer, Steering wheel remote input Grounding System: Negative ground
TUNER SECTION 0°C to +40°C
Frequency Range: Dimensions (W × H × D):
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Installation Size (approx.):
AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
without notice.
[LW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 50 μV
43

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de

fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil
EN, FR
Rear_KD-G821[EX_EU]2.indd 2 9/12/05 4:06:52 pm

KD-G821
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
[EX/EU] EN, FR
ENGLISH FRANÇAIS
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez
ENTERTAINMENT dealers. acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
WARNINGS AVERTISSEMENTS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et
electrical connections before installing the unit. d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la
voiture après l’installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR Remarques:
ENTERTAINMENT dealer. • Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear d’autoradios JVC.
and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change • Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière
“Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS). et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape. inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp Gain” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 22 du
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit. MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande
isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet
appareil.
Heat sink
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections: PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit • NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,
will be seriously damaged. l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in • AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des
your car. enceintes de votre voiture.
Parts list for installation and connection Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A/B C D
Etui de transport/Panneau Manchon Plaque d’assemblage
de commande
E F G H
Cordon d’alimentation Rondelle (ø5) Ecrou d’arrêt (M5) Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)
I J K L M
Amortisseur en caoutchouc Poignées Télécommande Pile (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
CD-ROM
Instal1-2_KD-G821[EXEU]2.indd 1 12/23/05 3:26:20 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING) INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie
kits. d’approvisionnement.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician. • Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien
qualifié.

Réalisez les connexions électriques.

fuse on the rear.
*1 Lorsque vous mettez
l’appareil à la verticale, Bend the appropriate tabs to hold
faire attention de ne pas the sleeve firmly in place.
endommager le fusible situé Tordez les languettes appropriées
sur l’arrière.
pour maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit Retrait de l’appareil

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated

so that the unit can be removed.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil
hauban en option scans utiliser de manchon
Fire wall Stay (option) Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Cloison Hauban (en option)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2 *2 Not supplied for this unit.
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2 *2 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
Dashboard
Tableau de bord
Bracket*2
Screw (option) Support*2
Vis (en option)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Poche
Bracket*2
Support*2
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚. Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm.
Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
TROUBLESHOOTING EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• The fuse blows. • Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on. • L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers. • Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted. • Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds. • Interférence avec les sons.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords? * La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot. • L’appareil devient chaud.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• This unit does not work at all. • Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Have you reset your unit? * Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
Instal1-2_KD-G821[EXEU]2.indd 2 9/12/05 6:03:13 pm

ENGLISH FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
A If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel
Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur (Vauxhall)
ISO You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated. • Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration. Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
Original wiring / Câblage original Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1

A B From the car body
C D De la carrosserie de la voiture
E F
G H
ISO connector
Connecteur ISO
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
I J ISO connector of the supplied power cord Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.
K L Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation
M N
fourni
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2
O P
View from the lead side Y: Yellow R: Red

Vue à partir du côté des fils
Jaune Rouge
B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion
damage to this unit. incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color. Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en
couleur.
1 Cut the ISO connector.
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.
2 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
3 Connect the aerial cord.
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme )
Aerial connector
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )
Connecteur d’antenne
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme )
15 A fuse
Fusible 15 A

Rear ground *1 Non fourni avec cet autoradio. Interrupteur d’allumage
terminal
Borne arrière
de masse Black
Noir
Line out (see diagram ) Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )
Yellow*2
To external components (see diagram ) Jaune*2 To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme ) ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en
dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Red Fuse block

Rouge Porte-fusible
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.
*2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut Blue with white stripe
pas être mis sous tension. Bleu avec bande blanche To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
(200 mA max.)

Orange avec bande blanche
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Brown
Marron
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
Blanc avec bande noire Blanc Gris avec bande noire Gris Vert avec bande noire Vert Violet avec bande noire Violet
Enceinte gauche (avant) Enceinte droit (avant) Enceinte gauche (arrière) Enceinte droit (arrière)
Instal3-4_KD-G821[EXEU]2.indd 3 15/12/05 8:25:53 pm

C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system. Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système stéréo.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it • Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de
can be controlled through this unit. l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils
leads of this unit unused. d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this – Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité
unit. Hi-Fi pour les sons reproduits par cet appareil.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down the gain control on the Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil, diminuez le réglage du gain
external amplifier to obtain the best performance from this unit. sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
Remote lead Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Fil d’alimentation à distance Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche) To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Rear speakers JVC Amplifier

Enceintes arrière JVC Amplificateur
Subwoofer *3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the
Caisson de metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to
JVC Amplifier grave the place uncoated with paint (if coated with
JVC Amplificateur paint, remove the paint before attaching the
wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
Rear speakers *3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse
Enceintes arrière au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un
endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture
Front speakers Front speakers (see diagram ) (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord
Enceintes avant Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme ) la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait
*5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s correctement.
JVC Amplifier
ISO connector and connect them to the
JVC Amplificateur amplifier.
*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*5 Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière
du connecteur ISO de la voiture et *4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet
connectez-les à l’amplificateur. autoradio)
D Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils extérieurs

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Changeur de CD, tuner DAB, iPod‚ Apple® ou lecteur D. JVC
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Choisissez “Changer” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur l’illustration. Le iPod*6 ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou KS-PD500
(pour le lecteur D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
or
ou JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC DAB tuner JVC CD changer Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément) CAUTION / PRECAUTION:
Tuner DAB JVC Changeur CD JVC Before connecting the external
components, make sure that the unit
CD changer jack
is turned off.
Prise du changeur de CD Avant de connecter les appareils
extérieurs, assurez-vous que l’appareil
est hors tension.
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)
Apple iPod (separately purchased) *6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,
iPod Apple (vendu séparément) Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
*6 iPod est une marque de commerce
d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux
or États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
ou JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC DAB tuner or JVC CD changer Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)
ou *7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD
Tuner DAB JVC Changeur CD JVC
changer or DAB tuner
*7 Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre
CD changer jack changeur CD ou tuner DAB
Prise du changeur de CD
Other external component / Autre appareil extérieur

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Choisissez “Ext In” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 22 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
External component
Appareil extérieur
External component
CD changer jack
Appareil extérieur *8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
Prise du changeur de CD
*8 Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm *9 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
*9 Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
E Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the controller. OE remote adapter (not supplied)
To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. Consult your JVC Steering wheel remote input Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details. Entrée de la télécommande de volant
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la
télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant à votre
voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
Instal3-4_KD-G821[EXEU]f.indd 4 12/29/05 2:54:55 PM

РУCCKИЙ DEUTSCH ENGLISH
CD RECEIVER
CD-RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ
KD-G821

Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 6.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.

Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
GET0362-006A
[EY]

ENGLISH


mode.

Caution:

CONTENTS
ENGLISH
Getting started ................................. 6
Press either
one.
Maintenance .................................... 39
Specifications ................................... 43

output level. unit.
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is
imprinted on the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify
your unit if stolen.
EN02-05KD-G821[EY]f.indd 3 12/28/05 10:52:34 AM

Control panel
ENGLISH


Lever CAUTION:

ENGLISH
(CR2025)

4 SOUND button
equalizer).


5

5 SOURCE button
• Selects the source. !
ENGLISH

pressed briefly. • For FM/AM tuner
held.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if • For DAB tuner
pressed and held.
(in menu selecting mode): ⁄ Adjust the volume.
held.
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel @ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
remote control function. pages 17 – 19.)
• See the Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume) for connection.
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

Getting started again.

Basic operations
Ÿ Basic settings
19 – 22.
1

are not ready or not connected. 2-1 Canceling the display
demonstrations
to “Off.”

1 Press number button 4 ( ). *2
ENGLISH
hour.
“LARGE” (full display size) graphic*1 is displayed.
“24Hours” or “12Hours,” time Audio level meter is displayed (see “LevelMeter” on page 20).
display mode.

To check the current clock time when the operation is performed for five seconds.
power is turned off
Radio operations
~
Ÿ

stops.

again.
7

ENGLISH
1
3 Select “SSM.”
4
receive
1
band.
Manual presetting

be lost.

2

3
number button 3.

ENGLISH
1
2


listen to.

FM RDS operations
following:

9

ENGLISH

code.
number button 3.
programme types
number button 3.
1

( ) repeatedly.
10
EN06-17KD-G821[EX_EU]2.indd 10 16/12/05 11:20:55 am

ENGLISH
goes off.

tuner.



activated.
11

ENGLISH
operations



~
PTY codes
Ÿ Select a disc.
12

ENGLISH
USB memory.
playback.



as the source.
previously.
assigned.)
out from the unit.
(see page 21).
Cautions:
13

ENGLISH

For MP3 tracks:
in “folders.”
For WMA tracks:

changer.


MP3/WMA/USB):
14

ENGLISH
number button 3.
1

1

skip 10 tracks.
“CD-CH.”
WMA, or USB.
4 Select an item.

6( ) repeatedly.
15

ENGLISH

procedure. [ ].
[ ].
Off: Cancels.

7 Random play
modes at a time.

and so on [ ].
[ ].
or USB memory [ ].
Off: Cancels.
Off: Cancels.
16

ENGLISH
120 Hz are cut off.
160 Hz are cut off.
1 [–5 to +5]
FM sound level.
D Loudness
levels. [Off or On]
display.
by pressing:

number button 3.

17

width.
ENGLISH

+06 +06 +06
200 Hz 2.5kHz 17.5kHz
width) Q1.25 Q0.75
Q1.5 Q1.0

frequency ranges.
number button 3.

frequency.
18

Preset values
ENGLISH
Sound Low Mid High
FLAT 00 60 Hz Q1.25 00 1 kHz Q1.25 00 10 kHz
R&B +03 80 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +03 15 kHz
POP +02 100 Hz Q1.25 +01 1 kHz Q1.25 +02 10 kHz



display.

To display the rest

19

ENGLISH

Off: Cancels.
MOVIE
20 seconds.
Clock Hr 0 – 23 (1 – 12AM/1 – 12PM), [7]
Clock Min 00 – 59, [7]
CLOCK

the RDS signal.
Off: Cancels.
DISPLAY
Off: Cancels.
20

ENGLISH
legible.
DISPLAY

Off: Cancels.
same programme.
TUNER
set to “On”).
TA Volume 0 — 30 or 0 — 50*3, [11]
volume
sufficient.

21

ENGLISH

TUNER

remain.
the above, [30].
AUDIO

COLOR

22

ENGLISH
and movies.
supplied CD-ROM.
23

ENGLISH


2


3 Select a folder.
Deleting the files

5 Select a file.

step 4 on page 23
24

ENGLISH
23

2

the selection.

pictures.
25

ENGLISH

number button 3.

is selected

to step 3. time.
beeps sound.
3 Select a file.*

26

ENGLISH


beginning)

page 22.
4 Select a color.


27

ENGLISH
(Ext In).
entering the title.
Maximum number of
Sources
characters
4 Store the title.
30 discs)
components
WMA/USB.
number button 3.

(see page 22).
of this unit.
28

ENGLISH

Preparations:

Ÿ


For iPod:
beginning)
For D. player:
29

ENGLISH

menu, press 5.

automatically.
items at a time.
D. player [ ].
Off: Cancels.
“MENU.”

operations
[ ].
[ ].
pages 28 – 30.
Off: Cancels.

30

ENGLISH

again.

What is DAB system?
the following:
AF” on page 22).
1
~

31

or 3).
ENGLISH
3

service. 2
PTY codes.
only.

store into.
each band.
number button 3.
32

ENGLISH
following)


services.

to listen to.
1

Standby Reception.
announcement type.

33

ENGLISH

Reception.
goes off. DLS....
Announcement types
Finance

hold DISP again.
34
EN28-35KD-G821[EX_EU]f.indd 34 22/12/05 9:09:31 am

ENGLISH
Basic operations
Inserting a disc
preset level.
sounds.
35

ENGLISH

WMA files.
while playing.
<.wma>).
inside the unit.
characters
313 or more.
damage to the unit.
MP3 PRO format.
not constant.
36

ENGLISH
– Bit rate:

WMA folder. source.
“CD.”

37

ENGLISH

• In addition to the Roman alphabets (A – Z,
frame).
a – z), the following characters will be used.
frames.
Upper case
frames.
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start Lower case
downloading.
Numbers and symbols
this case, change the “Dimmer” setting to any iPod or D. player operations
unit.
correctly.
“Volume 30.”
Title assignment communication between the iPod or
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 D. player and the unit.
station frequencies or 30 discs, “Name • If the text information includes more than
Full” appears. Delete unwanted titles before 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see
assignment. also page 20). This unit can display up to 40
characters.
38

ENGLISH
How to handle discs
Static PTY.
use.
Connector
Warped disc
39

Troubleshooting
ENGLISH
center.
General
FM/AM
work.
radio.
be skipped.
Disc playback
Error” flashes).
the file names.
MP3/WMA playback

display).
40

ENGLISH
MP3/WMA playback

track.
tracks.)
display. memory.
USB memory playback

and track skips.
corrupted.
display.
display.
CD changer
the display.

41

ENGLISH

PICT—PSM

not work correctly.
iPod/D. player.

this unit.
this unit.
display.
DAB
display.
42

Specifications
ENGLISH
Other Terminals: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
CD changer, Steering wheel remote input Grounding System: Negative ground
TUNER SECTION 0°C to +40°C
Frequency Range: Dimensions (W × H × D):
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Installation Size (approx.):
AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz 182 mm × 52 mm × 152 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
without notice.
[LW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 50 μV
43

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts
Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу
EN, GE, RU
Rear_KD-G821_006A_1.indd 2 15/12/05 5:25:39 pm

KD-G821
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
GET0362-013A Руководство по установке/подключению 0106DTSMDTJEIN
[EY] EN, GE, RU
ENGLISH DEUTSCH РУССКИЙ

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор
ENTERTAINMENT dealers. Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann. напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
WARNINGS WARNUNGEN ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и
installing the unit. herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird. осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after • Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des • После установки обязательно заземлите данное
installation. Fahrzeugs geerdet wird. устройство на шасси автомобиля.
Notes: Hinweise: Примечания:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows • Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen. • Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer. Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum Autoradiohändler. часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von • Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели
change “Amp Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from being einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если
damaged (see page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS). weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „Amp Gain“ anders ein, um максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 22 der режим “Amp Gain”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.
with insulating tape. BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG). ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22).
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it • Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen • Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте
when removing this unit. der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
umwickeln. • Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.
Heat sink
Abstrahlblech
Радиатор
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher: подключению громкоговорителей:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der • НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged. Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the beschädigt wird. повреждено.
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car. • VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des • ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen. соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.
Parts list for installation and connection Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß Список деталей для установки и подключения
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert. Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC- При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с
Autoradiohändler. дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.
A/B C D
Etui/Schalttafel Halterung Frontrahmen
Жесткий футляр/панель управления Муфта Декоративную панель
E F G H
Stromkable Unterlegscheibe (ø5) Sicherungsmutter (M5) Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)
Кабель питания Шайба (њ5) Фиксирующая гайка (M5) Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)
I J K L M
Gummipuffer Griffe Fernbedienung Batterie (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
Резиновый чехол Рычаги диcтaнциoннoго Бaтapeйкa CD-ROM
yпpaвлeния (Image Converter: Ver 3.0)
CD-ROM
Instal1-2_KD-G821_013A_1.indd 1 12/29/05 11:20:37 AM

INSTALLATION EINBAU УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В
(IN-DASH MOUNTING) (IM ARMATURENBRETT) ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.
any questions or require information regarding installation kits, irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста
supplying kits. Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed vertreibt. принадлежности.
by a qualified technician. • Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen. устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen
Anschlüsse vor.
Выполните необходимые подключения
контактов, как показано на оборотной
стороне этой инструкции.
*1 When you stand the unit, be

careful not to damage the fuse
on the rear.
*1 Beim Aufstellen des Geräts
darauf achten, daß die Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
Sicherung auf der Rückseite sleeve firmly in place.
nicht beschädigt wird. Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die
*1 Устанавливайте устройство
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.
таким образом, чтобы не
повредить предохранитель,
Отогните соответствующие
расположенный сзади. фиксаторы, предназначенные для
прочной установки корпуса.
Removing the unit Ausbau des Geräts Удаление устройства

Before removing the unit, release the rear section. Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben. Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so

that the unit can be removed.
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie in
der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt werden
kann.
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne
der Anker-Option / При использовании Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты
дополнительной стойки In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Stay (option)
In einem Toyota-Automobil z.B. bauen Sie zuerst das Autoradio aus und installieren dann das Gerät an seiner Stelle.
Fire wall В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.
Feuerwand Anker (Option)
Стена Стойка Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
(дополнительно) Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2 *2 Not supplied for this unit.
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2 *2 Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
Dashboard Bracket*2 *2 Hе входит в комплект поставки.
Armaturenbrett Konsole*2
Приборная панель Кронштейн*2
Screw (option)
Schraube (Option)
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Винт (дополнительно)
Pocket Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Taschen
Bracket*2
Карман
Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2
used, they could damage the unit.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Hinweis : Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.
weniger als 30˚ auf. Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°. использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.
TROUBLESHOOTING FEHLERSUCHE BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

• The fuse blows. • Die Sicherung brennt durch. • Сработал предохранитель.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly? * Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen? * Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
• Power cannot be turned on. • Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden. • Питание не включается.
* Is the yellow lead connected? * Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen? * Подключен ли желтый провод?
• No sound from the speakers. • Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern. • Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited? * Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen? * Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода
• Sound is distorted. • Ton verzerrt. громкоговорителей?
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? * Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet? • Звук искажен.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher * Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
• Noise interfere with sounds. zusammen geerdet? * Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using • Störgeräusche im Klang. громкоговорителей?
shorter and thicker cords? * Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an • Шум мешает звучанию.
• This unit becomes hot. das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen? * Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси
* Is the speaker output lead grounded? • Gerät wird heiß. автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common? * Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet? • Устройство нагревается.
• This unit does not work at all. * Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher * Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Have you reset your unit? zusammen geerdet? * Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht. громкоговорителей?
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen? • Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
2
Instal1-2_KD-G821_013A_1.indd 2 12/9/05 2:23:48 PM

ENGLISH DEUTSCH РУССКИЙ
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
A If your car is equipped with the ISO For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem (Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated. • Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.
• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке. • Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung / Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /
From the car body Исходная схема соединений Преобразованная схема соединений 1
A B Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie
C D От корпуса автомобиля
E F
G H
ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Разъем ISO Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.
I J
ISO connector of the supplied power cord Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2.
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels
K L Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в
M N
комплект поставки Преобразованная схема соединений 2
O P
Y: Yellow R: Red
View from the lead side Gelb Rot
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen Желтый Красный
Вид со стороны выводов
B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования
разъемов ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit. überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car hervorrufen. привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
body may be different in color. Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова
1 Cut the ISO connector. können sich farblich unterscheiden. автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order 1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf. 1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.
specified in the illustration below. 2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen, 2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в
3 Connect the aerial cord. wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt. указанном ниже порядке.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit. 3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen. 3 Подключите кабель антенны.
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen. 4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к
устройству.

An Subwoofer (siehe Schaltplan )
Aerial connector К низкочастотному динамику (см. схему )
Antennenanschluss To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )
Разъем антенны An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan )
К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (см. схему )
15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Предохранитель 15 A
Rear ground terminal *1 Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert. Zündschalter
Hintere Erdungsc- *1 Не входит в комплект поставки. Переключатель зажигания
anschlußklemme Black
Задний разъем заземления Schwarz
Черный To metallic body or chassis of the car
Line out (see diagram ) Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
Schutz kappen Signalausgang К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
(siehe Schaltplan )
К выходу (см. схему )
Yellow*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
Gelb*2
To external components (see diagram ) ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Желтый*2
An externe Komponenten (siehe Schaltplan ) Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen
К внешним устройствам (см. схему ) an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
Red
Rot Fuse block
Красный To an accessory terminal in the fuse block Sicherungsblock
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock Блок предохранителя
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be
turned on. Blue with white stripe
*2 Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor Blau mit weißem Streifen
dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst Синий с белой полосой To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann. Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)
*2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
провод, иначе питание не включится.
Orange mit weißem Streifen
Оранжевый с белой полосой To car light control switch
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля
Brown
Braun
Коричневый To cellular phone system
An Mobiltelefonsystem
К мобильной телефонной системе
Weiß mit schwarzem Weiß Grau mit schwarzem Grau Grün mit schwarzem Grün Lila mit schwarzem Lila
Streifen Белый Streifen Серый Streifen Зеленый Streifen Пурпурный
Белый с черной Серый с черной Зеленый с черной Пурпурный с черной
полосой полосой полосой полосой
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne) Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne) Linker Lautsprecher (hinten) Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Левый громкоговоритель Правый громкоговоритель Левый громкоговоритель Правый громкоговоритель
(передний) (передний) (задний) (задний)

C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Anschließen der externen Verstärker und/oder Subwoofer / Подключение внешних
усилителей и/или низкочастотного динамика
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system. Sie können Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu erweitern. Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote • Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an стереосистемы.
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses • Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой
this unit. Gerät gesteuert werden kann. полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого оборудования
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the • Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused. Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses • Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства,
– The line output level of this unit is kept high to maintain the Geräts unbenutzt lassen. подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте провода
hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit. – Der Ausgangspegel dieses Geräts wird auf einem hohen Wert gehalten, громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn um den Hifi-Klang zu unterstützen, den dieses Gerät reproduziert. – Уровень выходного сигнала линии данного устройства
поддерживается высоким, чтобы обеспечить высококачественный
down the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the Wenn Sie einen externen Verstärker an dieses Gerät anschließen,
звук, воспроизводимый данным устройством.
best performance from this unit. stellen Sie den Verstärkungsregler des externen Verstärkers herunter, um При подключении внешнего усилителя к данному устройству
die bestmögliche Leistung dieses Geräts zu erzielen. убавьте регулировку усиления на внешнем усилителе, чтобы
обеспечить оптимальные характеристики работы данного устройства.
Remote lead To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Fernbedienungsleitung Y-connector (not supplied for this unit) Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
Провод внешнего Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert) К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
устройства Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe) body or to the chassis of the car—to the place not
Rear speakers Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit JVC Amplifier coated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
Hintere Lautsprecher weißem Streifen) the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do
Задние JVC Verstärker
Провод внешнего устройства so may cause damage to the unit.
громкоговорители JVC-усилитель *3 Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der
(Синий с белой полосой) Subwoofer
JVC Amplifier Subwoofer Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die
Низкочастотный Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die
JVC Verstärker динамик Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack
JVC-усилитель der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen).
Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß
Rear speakers angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt
Hintere Lautsprecher werden.
Задние громкоговорители *3 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод
Front speakers к металлическому кузову или шасси
Vordere Lautsprecher Front speakers (see diagram )
Передние Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan ) автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской
громкоговорители Передние громкоговорители (см. схему ) (если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску
перед тем, как прикреплять провод).
JVC Amplifier *5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO Невыполнение этого требования может
connector and connect them to the amplifier. привести к повреждению данного устройства.
JVC Verstärker
*5 Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des
JVC-усилитель ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und
schließen diese an den Verstärker an. *4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*5 Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей *4 Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю. *4 Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
D Connecting the external components / Anschließen der externen Komponenten / Подключение внешних устройств
CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD-Wechsler, DAB-Tuner, Apple iPod® oder JVC D. Player / Устройство автоматической смены
компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, Apple iPod® или проигрыватель JVC D.
• Set “Changer” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „Changer“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 22 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) /
Установите для внешнего входа значение “Changer” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22.)
Sie können diese Komponenten in Reihe anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt. Der iPod*6 oder D. Player kann mit einem Schnittstellenadapter angeschlossen werden (nicht mitgeliefert)—KS-PD100
(für iPod) oder KS-PD500 (für D. Player).
Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*6 или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект
поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).
Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Anschluss 1 (integrierter Anschluss) / Apple iPod
Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение) (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)
Apple iPod CAUTION / ACHTUNG / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:
or (продается отдельно) Before connecting the external components, make
oder sure that the unit is turned off.
JVC DAB tuner JVC CD changer JVC D. player Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten
или
DAB-Tuner von JVC CD-Wechsler von JVC (separately purchased) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.
Тюнер DAB JVC Устройство автоматической JVC D. Player Перед подключением внешних компонентов
смены компакт-дисков JVC (getrennt gekauft) убедитесь в том, что устройство выключено.
CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler / Проигрыватель JVC D.
Разъем устройства автоматической (продается отдельно)
смены компакт-дисков *6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Anschluss 2 (alternativer Anschluss) / *6 iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc.,
Apple iPod eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.
Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение) (separately purchased) *6 iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer,
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft) Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других
Apple iPod странах.
or (продается отдельно)
oder *7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or
or JVC CD changer JVC D. player DAB tuner
JVC DAB tuner или
oder CD-Wechsler von JVC (separately purchased) *7 Anschließen des für CD-Wechsler oder DAB-Tuner
DAB-Tuner von JVC Устройство автоматической JVC D. Player mitgelieferten Kabels
Тюнер DAB JVC или смены компакт-дисков JVC (getrennt gekauft) *7 Подключение кабеля, входящего в комплект
CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler / Проигрыватель JVC D. поставки устройства автоматической смены
Разъем устройства автоматической (продается отдельно) компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB
смены компакт-дисков
Other external component / Andere externe Komponenten / Другое внешнее устройство

• Set “Ext In” for the external input setting (See page 22 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „Ext In“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 22 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / Установите для
внешнего входа значение “Ext In” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 22.)
External component *8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)
Externe Komponente *8 Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (wird nicht mit Gerät
Внешнее устройство mitgeliefert)
CD changer jack *8 Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в
Buchse für CD-Wechsler External component комплект поставки)
Разъем устройства Externe Komponente
автоматической смены Внешнее устройство *9 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
компакт-дисков *9 AUX-Eingangsadapter KS-U58 (wird nicht mit Gerät
3.5 mm stereo mini plug mitgeliefert)
3,5-mm-Stereo-Ministecker *9 Адаптер для подключения дополнительных
Мини-разъем стерео-3,5 мм устройств KS-U58 (не входит в комплект поставки)
E Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту
дистанционного управления OE remote adapter (not supplied)
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the Steering wheel remote input Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details. Вход рулевого пульта поставляется)
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern. дистанционного управления
Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht im
Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.
Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного управления, его можно Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
использовать для управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого пульта Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)
дистанционного управления JVC OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля. За более Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый в
подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC. автомобиле)
4

JVC KD-G820 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JVC KD-G820 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL ENGLISH

RECEPTOR CON CD KD-AR870/KD-G820

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Cover_KD-AR870_820[J]1.indd 2 5/12/05 4:54:26 pm

INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

How to reset your unit How to forcibly eject a disc

“Please Eject” appears on the display.

Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 2 9/12/05 4:38:38 pm

Temperature inside the car...

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 3 9/12/05 10:55:07 am

the illustrations in the table below.

Press and hold both Caution on volume setting:

: External USB memory operations.

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 4 5/12/05 4:52:28 pm

1 BAND button 7 EQ (equalizer) button

How to detach/attach the control panel

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]2.indd 5 9/12/05 9:50:35 am

Installing the lithium coin battery Caution:

Main elements and features

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 6 5/12/05 4:52:30 pm

⁄ Adjust the volume.

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See

Continued on next page...

EN02-07KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 7 5/12/05 4:52:31 pm

To restore the sound, press it

To turn off the power

Ex.: When tuner is selected as the source

2-1 Canceling the display

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]f.indd 8 20/12/05 3:44:53 pm

! Start searching for a station. 3 Exit from the setting.

When a station is received, searching lights up on the display.

To tune in to a station manually

FM station automatic presetting—

Continued on next page...

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 9 5/12/05 4:52:47 pm

move back to the previous display by pressing

1 Follow steps 1 and 2 on left column.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

Using the number buttons

• You can move to the lists of the other FM

5 Store the station.

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 10 5/12/05 4:52:48 pm

To stop playback and eject the disc

Using the Preset Station List

2 Change to the selected station. ~

* If you have changed the external input

For disc number from 07 – 12:

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 11 5/12/05 4:52:51 pm

Ex.: When “CD-CH” is selected as the source

Current folder number*1

Ÿ USB input terminal

USB memory • When playing CD changer, the total

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 12 5/12/05 4:52:52 pm

When an MP3/WMA folder in an MP3/

To fast-forward or reverse the track • To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/

To go to the next or previous tracks To select a particular track in a folder (for

EN08-15KD-AR870G820[J]1.indd 13 5/12/05 4:52:55 pm

Selecting a disc/folder/track on the list

• For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks